Honda 2008 Civic Si Coupe Users Manual

Honda-2008-Civic-Sedan-4-Door-Owners-Manual-107063 honda-2008-civic-sedan-4-door-owners-manual-107063

Honda-2008-Honda-Civic-Coupe-Owners-Manual-816646 honda-2008-honda-civic-coupe-owners-manual-816646

2008 Honda Civic Si Sedan Owners Manual NA0808OM Troubleshoot 2008 Honda Civic Si Sedan |

2015-03-12

: Honda Honda-2008-Civic-Si-Coupe-Users-Manual-657137 honda-2008-civic-si-coupe-users-manual-657137 honda pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 324

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４０：４７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０００２

Main Menu

Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Civic was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.

As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４０：５１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０００３

Main Menu

Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４１：０２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０００４

Main Menu

A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.

iii

2008 Civic Sedan

2008 Civic Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual
Refer to 2008 Civic GX Supplement for topics specific to the Civic GX.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ................................ 55
Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control) ............................ 107
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ..................................................................... 179
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 195
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 221
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ............................. 265
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 289
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 305
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 309
Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

00X31-SNA-6210

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４１：３０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０００７

Main Menu

Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.

Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
Maintenance
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.

Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index

Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.

2008 Civic Sedan

Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４１：３９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０００８

Main Menu

Your Vehicle at a Glance
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG
(P. 9, 30)

DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 9, 24)
MIRROR CONTROLS＊
(P. 102)

HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P. 108)

POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH＊
(P. 80)

DOOR LOCK TAB
(P. 79)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P. 99)

ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
(P. 106)

FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 181)
TRUNK RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 86)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK＊
(P. 172)

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES＊
(P. 98)

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P. 202)
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P. 199)

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

＊ : If equipped

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Your Vehicle at a Glance

MOONROOF SWITCH＊ (P. 100)
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 57)
GAUGES (P. 66)
AUDIO SYSTEM＊ (P. 112)

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４１：４６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０００９

Main Menu

Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS BUTTONS
(P. 73)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P. 72)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P. 71)
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P. 30)

DISPLAY CHANGE
BUTTON
(P. 66)
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
(P. 66)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P. 74)

VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH＊2 (P. 211)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
(P. 74)
HEATED MIRRORS＊2
(P. 103)

REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS＊2
(P. 171)
VOICE CONTROL
SWITCHES＊3
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 182)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

STEERING WHEEL
HORN＊1
ADJUSTMENT
(P. 75)

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS＊2
(P. 176)

＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４１：５０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１０

Main Menu

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 15
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17

Additional Information About Your
Seat Belts .................................. 18
Seat Belt System Components ... 18
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 21
Airbag System Components ....... 21
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 24
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 29
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 29
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
Airbag Service .............................. 31
Additional Safety Precautions .... 32
Protecting Children−General
Guidelines ................................. 33
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 33

All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 34
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 34
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 36
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 36
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 38
Protecting Infants ........................ 38
Protecting Small Children .......... 39
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 40
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 41
With LATCH ................................ 42
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 44
With a Tether ............................... 45
Protecting Larger Children ............ 47
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 47
Using a Booster Seat ................... 48
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 49
Additional Safety Precautions .... 50
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 51
Safety Labels .................................... 52

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４２：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 14 ).

Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 33 − 50 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with

2008 Civic Sedan

every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 223 ).

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４２：０７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(9)

(3)

(9)

(1)

(8)
(7)

(6)

(2)

(8)
(5) (12)
(10)
(11)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.

(4)

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４２：１８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.

2008 Civic Sedan

Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:

Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４２：２６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
24 for more information on how
your front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 27 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).

In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
29 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４２：３２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.

They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.

What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.

2008 Civic Sedan

The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember however, that no safety
system can prevent all injures or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４２：４３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Your vehicle has a door-open
indicator on the instrument panel to
indicate when any door is not tightly
closed.

See pages 33 − 37 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.

Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.

1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.

Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.

See page 79 for how to lock the
doors, and page 61 for how the dooropen indicator works.
Some models have the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page 81 .

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４２：５１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 75 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page 91 for how to adjust the
front seats.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４２：５９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 91 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.

Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 92 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.

Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４３：０５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００１９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.

Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４３：１４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause

If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat

If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
button and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).

belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 18 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.

Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

very serious injuries in a crash.

6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４３：２１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women

This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.

Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.

When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.

If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.

2008 Civic Sedan

Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４３：２７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.

Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a

objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.

side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.

Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on

Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your

the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４３：３７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages 26 and 27 ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.

the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.

This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before

2008 Civic Sedan

If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

０７／１０／２６ １４：２６：０３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.

restrain your body.

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.

If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.

All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help

For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４３：５５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.

Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
250 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.

Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４４：０１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components

(1)

(9)

(2)
(3) (12)

Driver and Passenger Safety

(8)

(11)
(5)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(6)
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
(14) Rear Safing Sensor

(4)
(13)
(5)
(10)

(7)

(10)

(14)

(4)
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４４：０６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 24 ).

(16)

Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 27 ).

(15)
(15)
(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second)
(16) Side Curtain Airbags

2008 Civic Sedan

Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
29 ).

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４４：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 19 ).

Sensors that can detect whether
a child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the
control unit to turn the airbag
off (see page 28 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the
front passenger’s seat belt are
latched or unlatched (see page
18 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
26 ).

A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.

An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 30 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 30 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.

An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 29 ).

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.

Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight
of an infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 26 ).

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４４：２３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００２９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work

During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.

If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.

This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.

If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 26 ).

2008 Civic Sedan

After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４４：３１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Stage Airbags

Dual-Threshold Airbags

Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.

Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.

In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.

If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４４：４０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags

Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.

DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR

The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.

2008 Civic Sedan

PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS

The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.

０７／１０／２６ １４：２６：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.

When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 30 ).

Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.

If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.

How Your Side Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety

Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.

Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
floor mats, make sure the floor mat
behind the front passenger’s seat is
hooked to the floor mat anchor (see
page 250 ). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.

If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.

This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４４：５８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

Side Airbag Cutoff System

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if position
sensors detect a child has leaned into
the side airbag’s deployment path,
the airbag will shut off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.

2008 Civic Sedan

If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 30 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４５：０８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work

To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

How the SRS Indicator
Works
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbags
or seat belt tensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４５：１６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.

Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.

How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
U.S.

Canada

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
and then go off (see page 60 ). If it
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.

2008 Civic Sedan

How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
U.S.

Canada

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４５：２６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.

The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.

Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.

Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.

If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４５：３２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your

airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during a crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.

Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and

seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause

the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the

driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.

2008 Civic Sedan

Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing

or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or

another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４５：４１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.

To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 38 − 46 ).

Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 47 − 50 ).

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４５：５０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００３９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.

The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 26 ),
please follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If

the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.

2008 Civic Sedan

Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is

too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,

larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 47 for important
information about protecting larger
children).

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４６：０３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
U.S. Models
Sun Visor

Dashboard

Driver and Passenger Safety

To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.

Canadian Models
Sun Visor

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４６：１２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 47 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 91 ).

If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.

Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
14 ).

2008 Civic Sedan

If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４６：２０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a

Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the

belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose

Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent

children from accidentally falling
out (see page 80 ).
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without

adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.

Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use. Children

who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature (see page 87 ).
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young

children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.

seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 44 and 45 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４６：２８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants

Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed

facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.

If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.

Child Seat Type

An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.

It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.

Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４６：３８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Placement

We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.

Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type

Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.

We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.

A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.

far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 26 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４６：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.

Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.

Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.

Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.

In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS

213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.

Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４６：５５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.

3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.

1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be

secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child

seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.

Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.

Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４７：０３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat Using
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.

BUTTON

The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.

LOWER ANCHORS

To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.

2008 Civic Sedan

Rigid type

3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４７：１１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
ANCHOR

Flexible type

Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.

5. Lift the head restraint (see page
93 ), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.

TETHER STRAP
HOOK

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４７：１８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００４９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.

2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４７：２７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Driver and Passenger Safety

ANCHORAGE POINTS

COVER

4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.

5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.

ANCHOR

A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４７：３３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

TETHER
STRAP
HOOK

ANCHOR

ANCHOR
Outer Position

1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 44 ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.

Center Position

2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４７：４０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.

Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.

The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.

If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver and Passenger Safety

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４７：４９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?

Using a Booster Seat

Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
40 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.

to drive.

If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend

2008 Civic Sedan

A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４８：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Larger Children

If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.

Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size

Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 14 and 47 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity

A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.

To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.

If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４８：０５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result

in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could

Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to

improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.

cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４８：１３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.

The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.

High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows,
and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.

2008 Civic Sedan

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４８：２８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

DASHBOARD

SUN VISOR

U.S. models only

U.S. models

If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label, which is removed
by the owner), contact your dealer
for a replacement.
Canadian models

RADIATOR CAP

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４８：４７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Safety Labels
HOOD

DOORJAMBS

U.S. models

Canadian models

Driver and Passenger Safety

Canadian models

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４８：４９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００５９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４８：５３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６０

Main Menu

Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.

Door Locks ....................................... 79
Power Door Locks ....................... 80
Childproof Door Locks ............... 80
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 81
Auto Door Locking ...................... 81
Auto Door Unlocking .................. 83
Trunk................................................. 86
Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 87
Remote Transmitter ........................ 88
Seats .................................................. 91
Seat Heaters ..................................... 98
Power Windows ............................... 99
Moonroof ........................................ 100
Mirrors ............................................ 102
Parking Brake ................................ 103
Interior Lights ................................ 104
Interior Convenience Items .......... 105
Beverage Holders ...................... 106
Accessory Power Socket .......... 106
Glove Box ................................... 106
Console Compartment .............. 106

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Control Locations ............................ 56
Instrument Panel ............................. 57
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 59
Gauges .............................................. 66
Odometer ...................................... 66
Display Change Button ............... 66
Trip Meter .................................... 67
Fuel Gauge ................................... 67
Temperature Gauge .................... 67
Outside Temperature
Indicator .................................... 68
Check Fuel Cap Message ........... 68
Maintenance Minder ................... 69
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ............................................ 70
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 71
Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 72
Daytime Running Lights............. 73
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 73
Hazard Warning Button .................. 74
Rear Window Defogger .................. 74
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 75
Keys and Locks ................................ 76
Immobilizer System......................... 77
Ignition Switch ................................. 78

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４９：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Control Locations

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 57)
GAUGES (P. 66)

MOONROOF SWITCH＊ (P. 100)

HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P. 108)

MIRROR CONTROLS＊
(P. 102)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH＊
(P. 80)

DOOR LOCK TAB
(P. 79)
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
(P. 106)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P. 99)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 181)
TRUNK RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 86)

AUDIO SYSTEM＊ (P. 112)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK＊
(P. 172)

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES＊
(P. 98)

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

＊ : If equipped

2008 Civic Sedan

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P. 202)
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P. 199)

０７／１０／２６ １４：２７：０６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel
DX, DX-G (Canada), LX, EX, EX-L
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 65)

DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
INDICATOR
(P. 61)

SIDE AIRBAG
LIGHTS ON
OFF INDICATOR INDICATOR
(P. 60)
(P. 61)

HIGH BEAM SUPPLEMENTAL
INDICATOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(P. 61)
INDICATOR (P. 60)

CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR (P. 64)

LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
TIRE PRESSURE
(P. 63)
MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) INDICATOR
(P. 63)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR (P. 60)

CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P. 64)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 60)

SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P. 59)

LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P. 65, 277)

TRUNK-OPEN
INDICATOR (P. 61)

CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 65, 277)

DOOR-OPEN
INDICATOR (P. 61)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 59)

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P. 65, 278) MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P. 65, 223)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.
Canadian DX-G model with M/T has the electric power steering (EPS) indicator (see page 62) next to the immobilizer system indicator.

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P. 64)

０７／０７／０５ ０９：１５：１６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel
Si
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 65)

VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG
(P. 62)
OFF INDICATOR
(P. 60)

REV LIMIT INDICATOR (P. 64)

LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P. 64)
LIGHTS ON HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR INDICATOR
(P. 61)
(P. 61)

SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 60)

DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS INDICATOR (P. 61)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 62)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P. 64)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR (P. 62)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P. 65, 277)

MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR (P. 65, 223)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 65, 277)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P. 65, 278)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR (P. 63)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR (P. 60)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P. 59)
DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR
(P. 61)
TRUNK-OPEN INDICATOR
(P. 61)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 59)

CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR (P. 64)

LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P. 63)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 60)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４９：２６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.

If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 18 .

Canada

1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 279 .

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.

Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
U.S.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４９：３５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags, automatic seat
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page 29 .

U.S.

Canada

Side Airbag Off
Indicator

This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page 30 .
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page 208 .

2008 Civic Sedan

Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page 77 ).

０７／０７／０３ ２０：４９：４６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.

‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the circuit. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 72 .

Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
Trunk-open Indicator

This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 73 ).

This indicator comes on if the trunk
lid is not closed tightly.
Door-open Indicator
This indicator comes on if any door
is not closed tightly.

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 246 and 247 ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１０：１２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

If equipped

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.

This indicator has three functions:

If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
210 for more information on the
VSA system.

1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 210 ).
3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. See page 210 for more
information on the VSA system.

2008 Civic Sedan

Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
Si and Canadian DX-G with manual
transmission models

This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and goes off
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will not turn
off immediately. If it does not go off
after driving a short distance, or
comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be off, making the
vehicle harder to steer.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５０：０６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator

U.S. models only

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.

If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 267 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 286 ). For more
information, see page 212 .

If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering due to overheating of the
steering gear box.

０７／０７／０５ １６：４１：１１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００６９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
Rev Limit Indicator
REV LIMIT INDICATOR

Cruise Main Indicator
If equipped

This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page 176 ).

Low Fuel Indicator
LOW FUEL INDICATOR

Cruise Control Indicator
If equipped
Si model only

This indicator shows you when the
engine speed is near the tachometer’s
red zone. When the engine speed
gets to near the red zone, the
indicator blinks. If you exceed the
maximum speed for the gear you are
in, the indicator stays on, and you
may feel the engine cut in and out
due to the engine speed limiter (see
page 201 ).

This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
176 for information on operating the
cruise control.
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only

This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 239 ).

To protect the engine from damage,
never drive with the tachometer in
its red zone.

2008 Civic Sedan

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon. When the indicator
comes on, there is about 0.9 US gal
(3.5 ) of fuel remaining in the tank
before the reading reaches E. There
is a small reserve of fuel remaining
in the tank when the reading does
reach E.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５０：３０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.

Security System Indicator
Except Si

Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 278 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 277 .

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

If equipped

This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
175 for more information on the
security system.

Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 277 .

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Maintenance Minder
Indicator
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the
information display. See page 223 for
more information on the
maintenance minder.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５０：３８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Gauges
SPEEDOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
FUEL
GAUGE
TACHOMETER

INFORMATION
DISPLAY
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

TRIP METER

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BUTTONS

SEL/RESET BUTTON

DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

U.S. model with A/T is shown

2008 Civic Sedan

To switch the information display
between the odometer, trip meter,
outside temperature (if equipped),
and engine oil life and maintenance
item code(s), press the SEL/RESET
button repeatedly.
Odometer
This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles or kilometers.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
Display Change Button
Press and hold until the speedometer,
trip meter, and odometer readings
switch between miles per hour and
kilometers per hour. A beeper will
sound.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５０：４６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Gauges
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles or kilometers driven since you
last reset it.

Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.

Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.

Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the reading should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, such as
very hot weather or a long period of
uphill driving, the reading may rise
into the upper half of the gauge. If it
reaches the red (Hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. See
page 275 for instructions and
precautions on checking the engine
cooling system.

To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

There are two trip meters: TRIP A
and TRIP B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the SEL/
RESET button repeatedly.

Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５０：５５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
If equipped

This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
SEL/RESET button until the
temperature is shown on the
information display.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.

If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to ±5°F (±3°C) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
Select the outside temperature
display, then press and hold the
SEL/RESET button for 10 seconds.
The following sequence will appear
for 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5,
−4, −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,
3, −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,
release the SEL/RESET button. You
should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.

2008 Civic Sedan

Check Fuel Cap Message
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５１：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Gauges
Maintenance Minder
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 223 for
more information.

Instruments and Controls

If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 278 .

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５１：０６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
(P. 73)

HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P. 72)

WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P. 71)

DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON
(P. 66)
SEL/RESET BUTTON
(P. 66)

PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P. 30)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH＊2
(P. 211)

HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P. 74)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS＊2
(P. 171)
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES

＊3

HORN＊1
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 182)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT (P. 75)

REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P. 74)
HEATED MIRRORS＊2
(P. 103)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS＊2
(P. 176)

＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５１：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
OFF − The wipers are not activated.

ADJUSTMENT RING＊
＊: EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX

1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.

On EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX
models

The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to
the vehicle’s speed.

LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.

Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to
the shortest delay
(
position), the wipers
change to low speed operation
when the vehicle speed exceeds 12
mph (20km/h).

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

INT − The wipers operate every
few seconds. At low speed and
high speed, the wipers run
continuously.

While the vehicle is stopped and in
gear, the wipers sweep the
windshield whenever you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５１：２３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Headlights On − Turning the
switch to the ‘‘
’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
1. Turn Signal
2. OFF
3. Parking and interior lights
4. Headlights on
5. High Beams
6. Flash high beams

Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder.

2008 Civic Sedan

High Beams − Push the lever
forward until you hear a click. The
high beam indicator will come on
(see page 61 ). Pull the lever back to
return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５１：３１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Instrument Panel Brightness
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL BUTTONS

when you reach the maximum or
minimum brightness. The display
returns to the odometer 5 seconds
after you stop adjusting the
brightness.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to the
or
position.

The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
The buttons under the left side vent
control the brightness of the
instrument panel. Push the ＋ or −
button to adjust the brightness.
Separate adjustments can be made
when the headlights are on and off.
There are six brightness levels.
When you push either button, the
information display indicates the
current level. You will hear a tone

The center of each meter (upper and
lower) illuminates with reduced
brightness when you unlock and
open the driver’s door, and then goes
back to the selected brightness when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off or
position, the high beam
headlights come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.

０７／０７／０４ １７：４２：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００７９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button

Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.

Rear Window Defogger

The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe sideto-side.
EX-L,
Canadian
LX, EX,
and Si

Push the button to turn on the
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.

The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.

2008 Civic Sedan

On All EX-L, Canadian LX, EX, and Si
models

Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 103 .

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５１：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Steering Wheel Adjustment
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.

Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.

Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５１：５２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Keys and Locks
EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX models
KEY
NUMBER
TAG

MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER

VALET
KEY
(Gray)

The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle.

U.S. LX and Canadian DX-G models
KEY
NUMBER
TAG

MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER

VALET
KEY
(Gray)

The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keep the trunk and trunk release
handle locked when you leave your
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.

2008 Civic Sedan

DX model
KEY
NUMBER
TAG

MASTER
KEY
(Black)

VALET
KEY
(Gray)

You should have received a key
number tag with your set of keys.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５２：０２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.

The keys without a remote
transmitter do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.

The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start your engine, contact your
dealer.

Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.

Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５２：１１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Ignition Switch

ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.

The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in park.

2008 Civic Sedan

ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５２：１７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Ignition Switch, Door Locks
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.

On DX models
LOCK TAB

To lock

To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab out, and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, pull and hold
the outside door handle, then pull
the lock tab out. Release the handle,
then close the door.

To unlock

Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.

Each door has a lock tab next to the
inside door handle. Pull the tab out
to lock the door, and push it in to
unlock the door.

Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.

Door Locks

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５２：２７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Door Locks
Power Door Locks

To lock

To unlock

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

On all models except DX

To lock the doors, push the top of
the master door lock switch on
either front door, pull out the lock
tab on the driver’s door, or use the
key in the outside lock on the driver’s
door.
Pushing the bottom of either master
door lock switch unlocks all doors.

The lock tab on the passenger’s door
locks and unlocks only that door.
Pushing in the driver’s door lock tab
only unlocks the driver’s door.
To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, turn the key and
release it. If you turn it again, all
doors unlock.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull out
the lock tab and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch and pull
out the lock tab or push the top of
the master switch, then close the
door.
Lockout Prevention

With any door open and the key in
the ignition, both master door lock
switches are disabled. They are not
disabled when all the doors are
closed, or when the key is not in the
ignition.

2008 Civic Sedan

Childproof Door Locks
LEVER
Unlock

Lock

The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, push the lock
tab in, and use the outside door
handle.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５２：３７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Door Locks
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
On all models except DX

When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and apply
the parking brake. Make all settings
before you start driving.

To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:

The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
The doors lock whenever you
move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
This is the default setting.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.

Auto Door Locking
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５２：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Door Locks
3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).

To program the Park Lock mode:
Locks all doors when the shift lever is
moved out of the Park (P) position (A/T
vehicles only).

4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.

3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５２：５６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Door Locks
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speed
reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).

3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the
brake pedal, and move the shift
lever out of the Park (P) position.

A/T models

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).

5. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
On A/T vehicles, move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.

The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
On A/T vehicles, the driver’s door
unlocks when you move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
This is the default setting.

All doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to the Park (P)
position (A/T vehicles).

6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

4. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).

Auto Door Unlocking
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:

０７／１０／２６ １４：１０：２２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００８９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Door Locks
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
This is the default setting on M/T
vehicles.

To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:

3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.

All doors unlock whenever you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：１０：３５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Door Locks
To program the Park Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
when the shift lever is moved into the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles only).

3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:

To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
when the ignition switch is moved out of
the ON (II) position.
Instruments and Controls

Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
feature.

Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors unlock feature.
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.

A/T models

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５３：２４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Door Locks, Trunk
3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the
brake pedal, then move the shift
lever out of the Park (P) position.

Even though your vehicle’s battery is
removed or goes dead, the system
keeps the auto door lock/unlock
setting which you selected.

Trunk
PULL

4. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock

TRUNK RELEASE
HANDLE

feature,

MASTER KEY

Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors unlock feature.

To open the trunk, pull the trunk
release handle on the left side of the
driver’s seat. To protect items in the
trunk when you need to give the key
to someone else, lock the trunk
release handle with the master key,
and give the other person the valet
key.

5. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
On A/T vehicles, move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：１０：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Trunk
Emergency Trunk Opener

On EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX
models

Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.

You can also use the master key to
open the trunk.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging it,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard, page 51 .

RELEASE LEVER

As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever in the direction pointed by an
arrow.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see page 37 .

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

MASTER KEY

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５３：４１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Remote Transmitter
EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX models
PANIC BUTTON
TRUNK
UNLOCK BUTTON
RELEASE
BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON

UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON

U.S. LX and Canadian DX-G models

LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once. When you push
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a horn to verify that the
doors are locked. You cannot lock
the doors if any door is not fully
closed or the key is in the ignition
switch.

On U.S. LX, EX, EX-L, and Si models

If you push the LOCK button twice
within 5 seconds, you will hear a
horn to verify that the security
system has set.
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you press the button. This
button does not work when the key
is in the ignition switch.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the door activated
position) will come on when you
press the UNLOCK button. If you do
not open any door, the light stays on
for about 30 seconds, then fades out.
If you relock the doors with the
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the light goes
off immediately.

2008 Civic Sedan

If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
any of the doors within 30 seconds,
the doors automatically relock. On
U.S. LX, EX, EX-L, and Si models,
the security system will also set.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 1 second to attract attention;
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or insert the key.
On EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX
models

TRUNK RELEASE − Press this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５３：５１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care

Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.

Instruments and Controls

Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616

Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.

SCREW

To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５３：５８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same (＋ side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.

BATTERY

TAB

An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.

3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５４：０５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Seats
Front Seat Adjustments
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.

To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Make all adjustments before you
start driving.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５４：１２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Seats
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment

Head Restraints
See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.

Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.

They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.

The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５４：２１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Seats
Front

RELEASE BUTTON
SEAT-BACK

Adjusting the Head Restraint

The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.

Rear Center Position
CUSHION
LEG

SEAT-BACK

RELEASE BUTTON

When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, the
center head restraint should be
adjusted up or down, to match the
passenger’s height.

Removing the Head Restraint

To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seatback.

Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

LEGS

CUSHION

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５４：２９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ００９９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Seats
Active Head Restraints

against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.

For a head restraint system to work
properly:

After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.

Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.

If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.

Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.

The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５４：３７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１００

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Seats
Armrest

On EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX
models, the rear seat armrest is in
the center of the rear seat. Pivot it
down to use it.

Folding Rear Seat

On DX, U.S. LX, and Canadian DX-G
models

The seat-back can be folded down as
one piece.
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

The back of the rear seat folds down,
giving you direct access to the trunk.
The seat-back is released from inside
the trunk.

On all models except DX

To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to one of its three positions.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５４：４３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Seats

GUIDE

CENTER SHOULDER BELT

On EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX
models

The left and right seat-backs can be
folded separately from inside the
trunk.

When storing cargo, you can move
the rear center shoulder belt out of
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.

Pull

RELEASE

To release the seat-back, pull the
release under the trunk panel. Push
the seat-back down, then let go of
the release.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５４：４８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Seats
Make sure that the folded seat-back
does not press against the front
passenger’s seat, as this could cause
the weight sensors to work
improperly.

Instruments and Controls

Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seatback, and the center shoulder belt is
re-positioned in the guide whenever
the seat-back is in its upright position.
Be sure there are no twists in any
shoulder belt.

Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Loose items can fly forward and
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See Carrying Cargo on page
191 .
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 51 .

Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５４：５６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Seat Heaters
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.

Passenger’s Seat

In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
HEATERS

Driver’s Seat

On EX-L model

Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat is
only heated in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag cutoff
system.

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use seat heaters.
Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.

2008 Civic Sedan

Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５５：０４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Power Windows
Except DX and Canadian DX-G

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.

Except DX and Canadian DX-G
MAIN SWITCH

Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, the
passenger windows cannot be raised
or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch
off when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.

AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.

The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.

AUTO − To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５５：１３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Power Windows, Moonroof
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. To
reset the AUTO function after
reconnecting the battery or installing
the fuse, do this:
1. Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.

Moonroof

MOONROOF SWITCH

If equipped

Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position before operating the
moonroof switch on the ceiling
console.
To open the moonroof fully, pull
back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, briefly move the switch in
either direction.
To tilt the moonroof, push the center
of the moonroof switch straight up.
To stop the moonroof from tilting
fully open, push the moonroof switch
forward.

100

2008 Civic Sedan

Open

Tilt

To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull or push the moonroof
switch lightly to the first detent and
hold it. The moonroof will stop when
you release the switch.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５５：１９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Moonroof

Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch. The
key-off delay cancels as soon as you
open either front door. You must
then turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position for the moonroof to
operate.

If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.

Auto Reverse
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.

101

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

To close the moonroof fully, push
the moonroof switch forward to the
second detent, then release it. The
moonroof closes all the way. To stop
the moonroof from closing all the
way, briefly move the switch in
either direction.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５５：２８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
TAB
SELECTOR SWITCH

Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.

On all models except U.S. DX

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).

102

2008 Civic Sedan

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５５：３４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Mirrors, Parking Brake
Heated Mirrors

Parking Brake

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

On All EX-L, Canadian LX, EX, and Si
models

The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 59 ).

103

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５５：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１０９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Interior Lights
Ceiling Light
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON

OFF

After all doors are closed tightly, the
light(s) dims slightly, then fades out
in about 30 seconds.

SWITCHES

If you do not open any door after you
unlock the driver’s door or remove
the key from the ignition switch, the
light(s) fades out in about 30
seconds.
If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light(s) will go off after 3
minutes.

The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON (right), Door Activated,
and OFF (left). In the Door
Activated (center) position, the light
comes on when you:
Open any door.
Remove the key from the ignition.
Unlock the doors with the key or
the remote transmitter.

OFF
DOOR
ACTIVATED

On models with moonroof

The front ceiling light has a twoposition switch; Door Activated and
OFF.
Spotlights
On models with moonroof

The front ceiling light has two
spotlights. Push the spotlight lenses
to turn them on and off.

104

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５５：５１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Interior Lights, Interior Convenience Items
Interior Convenience Items
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

CENTER POCKET
COIN BOX

VANITY MIRROR

On all LX models, and EX and EX-L
models without moonroof

Push on the spotlight lenses to turn
the light on and off.

BEVERAGE
HOLDERS
BEVERAGE HOLDERS＊

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET＊

GLOVE BOX

＊ : If equipped

105

2008 Civic Sedan

Instruments and Controls

ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET

COAT HOOK

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５６：０２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
Open the front beverage holder by
sliding its cover backward.
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.

The EX, EX-L, and Si models have
another accessory power socket in
the center console compartment.
When more than one socket is being
used, the combined power rating of
the accessories should be 120 watts
or less (10 amps).
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push.

Console Compartment
LEVER

ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET

CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT

If equipped

Accessory Power Socket
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps). It will not power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.

An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.

To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

106

2008 Civic Sedan

To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.
To close, lower the lid, and push it
down until it latches.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５６：０９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１２

Main Menu

Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.

All models except U.S. DX

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
All U.S. models except DX

The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.

Cruise Control ................................ 176

Features

The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them. (If you have an optional
audio system, refer to the operating
instructions that came with it.)

Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 108
Using the A/C ............................ 110
Audio System ................................. 112
Audio System (Models without
navigation system) ................ 114
Playing the Radio ....................... 115
Playing the XM Satellite
Radio (Optional) .................... 119
Playing a Disc ............................. 124
Disc Player Error Messages .... 130
Audio System (Models with
navigation system) ................ 132
Playing the AM/FM Radio....... 132
Playing the XM Satellite
Radio ....................................... 136
Playing a Disc ............................. 144
Disc Player Error Messages .... 152
Playing a PC Card ...................... 153
PC Card Error Messages ......... 165
AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 166
Protecting Your Discs ................... 168
Remote Audio Controls................. 171
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 172
Radio Theft Protection.................. 173
Setting the Clock ........................... 174
Security System ............................. 175

107

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５６：１８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control Dial
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

FAN CONTROL DIAL
MODE BUTTONS

Temperature Control Dial
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
If equipped

This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator in the button is on when
the A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).

REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
(If equipped)

MAX A/C BUTTON

108

2008 Civic Sedan

(All EX-L,
Canadian LX,
EX, and Si
models)

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５６：３５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.

Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 74 ).
Mode Control
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.

Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select
, the
system automatically switches to
fresh air mode.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C
(if equipped).

MAX A/C Button
If equipped

The system automatically
turns on the A/C, selects
, and
switches to recirculation mode. Each
indicator in the button is on when
the MAX A/C is turned on.
Ventilation
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear side
panels.
1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.

109

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.

Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５６：４７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.

to maximum cool.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.

.
1. Select
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.

If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.

Using the A/C
If equipped

Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
67 ). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects
, and
switches to recirculation mode.
3. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.

1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected.
2. Make sure the temperature is set

110

2008 Civic Sedan

Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. If the A/C is off, turn it on (if
equipped).
3. Select
and fresh air mode.
4. Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５６：５８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:

To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
. When you select
1. Select
, the system automatically
switches to fresh air mode and
turns on the A/C (if equipped).
The A/C indicator will not come
on, if it was previously off.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
To Turn Everything Off
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.

111

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
. When you select
2. Select
, the system automatically
switches to fresh air mode and
turns on the A/C (if equipped).
The A/C indicator will not come
on, if it was previously off.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
4. Select
rear window.
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.

When you switch to
, from
or
, the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button twice. The indicator in the
button comes on and then goes off.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５７：０４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models except the U.S. DX. Read the
appropriate pages (as shown below)
to use your vehicle’s audio system.

Models without navigation system
All models except Si

For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages 114 through 131 .
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages 132 through 165 .
If your vehicle has a different audio
system, refer to its manual for
operating instructions.

112

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５７：０８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System

Models with navigation system
Si model

U.S. EX, EX-L, and Si models

Features

113

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５７：１９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１１９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Si model only

Your audio system shows a welcome
message on the display when you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. You can see a message
‘‘WELCOME’’ on the display when
your vehicle was new.
You can also customize this welcome
message to your liking with the
audio controls.
To Customize a Message
You can set up to about 16
characters on the display.

SEEK BUTTON

3. Turn the TUNE knob to change a
letter.

To select a character:
1. Make sure the audio system is off.
2. Push and hold the TUNE knob,
then push the power/volume knob
on the audio control panel. You
will see the first letter blinking.

TUNE KNOB

POWER/VOLUME
KNOB

4. Push the top of the SEEK button
to select the next segment, then
turn the TUNE knob to select a
letter. Repeat this procedure to set
your message.

114

2008 Civic Sedan

To change the letter, select the
previous segment by pushing the
bottom of the SEEK button.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop selecting a letter.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５７：２６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Playing the Radio
All models except Si

Si model

FM
SCAN
AM
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

Features

SCAN
BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

PWR/VOL KNOB

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

SEEK BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

CONTINUED

115

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５７：３５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button (the AM/FM button).
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button). On the
FM band, ST will be displayed if the
station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.

TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.

If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.

SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the
or
side of the
SEEK button, then release it.

Preset − Each side of the buttons
(1 through 6) can store one
frequency on AM, and two
frequencies on FM.

SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.

1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
twelve stations.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset number (1−6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

116

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５７：４３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.

If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.

Adjusting the Sound
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the bass (BAS),
treble (TRE), fader (FAD), balance
(BAL), and speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC) settings.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the SOUND
(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting to
your liking. When the level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘
’’ in
the display. The system will
automatically return the display to
the selected audio mode about 5
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.

CONTINUED

117

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM, and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５７：４８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Treble/Bass − Use the TREBLE/
BASS modes to adjust the tone to
your liking.
Balance/Fader − These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BALANCE adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while FADER adjusts the
front-to-back strength.

Speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC) − The SVC
mode controls the volume based on
vehicle speed. The faster you go, the
louder the audio volume becomes.
As you slow down, the audio volume
decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. The default setting is MID.
Turn the SOUND (TUNE) knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
If you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.

118

2008 Civic Sedan

Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control buttons to adjust
the illumination of the audio system
(see page 73 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５７：５５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Optional on U.S. EX, EX-L, and Si
models

Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

DISPLAY BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

Features

XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM satellite radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM satellite radio allows you to view
channel and category selections in
the display.
PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

U.S. Si model is shown

119

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５８：０１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the ‘‘AUX’’
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.

MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP button until
the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP button, the display changes in
the following sequence: Channel
name, channel number, category,
artist name, and music title.

You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
SEEK/SKIP − Press either side of
the SEEK/SKIP button (
or
) to select another category.

120

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５８：１３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune to a desired
channel.

Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using each side of
the preset button. Each side of the
button stores one channel from the
XM1 band and one channel from the
XM2 band.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.

To store a channel:

Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper side of the preset
button to tune to it.

1. Press the AUX button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.

In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
3. Pick a preset number you want for
that channel. Press and hold the
button until you hear a beep.

5. Press the AUX button again. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.

XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.

CONTINUED

121

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５８：１９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.

Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.

Signal weaker in
these areas.

‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

122

2008 Civic Sedan

Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５８：２９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:

There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.

Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system and press the AUX
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.

123

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.

As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５８：３７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１２９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Playing a Disc
All models except Si
EJECT BUTTON

Si model

REPEAT BUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR

CD BUTTON

RANDOM
BUTTON

DISPLAY
BUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR
EJECT
BUTTON

CD BUTTON

REPEAT
BUTTON

RANDOM
BUTTON

DISPLAY
BUTTON

SCAN
BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB

FOLDER KNOB

124

2008 Civic Sedan

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB

FOLDER KNOB

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５８：５０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To Play a Disc
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.

Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
−Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
To Load a Disc

Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track and
the elapsed time are shown in the
display. When playing a disc in MP3
or WMA, the numbers of the current
folder and file, and the elapsed time
are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
CONTINUED

125

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.

NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５９：０１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.

the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown.

Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the ＞ indicator in

You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.

126

2008 Civic Sedan

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

Use the SEEK/SKIP button while a
disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3/WMA
mode).
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release the
side of
the SEEK/SKIP button, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release the
side to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SEEK/SKIP button.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５９：０９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode

REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder

repeat, press the RPT button twice.
You will hear a beep and see F-RPT
in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
or selecting a different folder with
the TUNE knob also turns off the
repeat feature.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal playing.
RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see RDM
in the display. Press the RDM button
for 2 seconds to return to normal

play.
In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press and release the RDM button.
You will see F-RDM in the display.
The system will then select and play
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing and holding the RDM
button for 2 seconds, or by selecting
a different folder with the TUNE
knob.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal playing.

CONTINUED

127

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
the knob to the right to skip to the
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５９：１８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press the
SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA
mode, press the SCAN button
repeatedly to select SCAN. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a 10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press the SCAN
button again to get out of scan mode
and play the last track/file sampled.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP button also turns off the scan
feature.

In MP3 or WMA mode

F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP button, selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob, or
pressing the SCAN button, also turns
off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from folder scan to scan, then to
normal playing.

128

2008 Civic Sedan

To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button
(AM or FM button). Press the CD
button again to switch back to the
CD player.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５９：２５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.

Operating the Optional Disc
Changer
An optional six or eight disc changer
is available for your vehicle. This
disc changer uses the same controls
used for the in-dash disc player or
the radio.

Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
168 .

To select the disc changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 4
(DISC −) or the preset 1 (DISC ＋)
on the preset button. To select the
previous disc, press the preset 4
(DISC −), or the preset 1 (DISC ＋)
to select the next disc in sequence.

129

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

Load the desired discs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.

If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available disc to load and
play.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５９：３２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Disc Player Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page 169 .
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Message
HEAT ERROR＊
UNSUPPORT
FORMAT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL

Cause
High temperature
Track/File format not
supported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

＊ : Except Si model

130

2008 Civic Sedan

Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 169 ). Insert the disc again. If the
code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot
be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５９：４２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Optional Disc Changer Error
Messages
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.

If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.

Cause
FOCUS Error

No disc in the disc
magazine

Mechanical Error

No disc magazine in
the disc changer
High Temperature

Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

Solution
Press the magazine eject button, and pull the
magazine out. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
Insert disc.
Press the magazine eject button, pull the
magazine out, check for an error message, then
insert the magazine again. If the message does
not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
out, see your dealer.
Insert disc magazine.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

131

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.

Error Message

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５９：４８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Voice Control System
In addition to the standard audio
controls, the audio system in your
vehicle can be operated using the
voice control system. See the
navigation section in your Quick
Start Guide for an overview of this
system, and the Navigation System
Manual for complete details.

Playing the AM/FM Radio

FM2 ICON
FM1 ICON

AM ICON

AM/FM
BUTTON

AUTO SELECT
ICON

AUDIO
BUTTON

BACKGROUND
ICON
SOUND ICON

SCAN
BUTTON

TUNE BAR

132

2008 Civic Sedan

PRESET BUTTONS

０７／０７／０３ ２０：５９：５７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Play the AM/FM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.

You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Use the
control buttons on the left side of the
screen. The status bar appears on
the bottom of the screen each time
you operate any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see audio information
by touching the AUDIO INFO icon
on the lower of the screen.

For information on XM radio, see
page 136 .

To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the ▲ side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
▼ side to tune to a lower
frequency.
Press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of
the TUNE bar until you hear two
beeps to change the frequency
rapidly. Release the bar when the
display reaches the desired
frequency.

CONTINUED

133

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system.

The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button, or touch the desired band
icon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2).
On the FM band, STEREO will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：００：０５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１３９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
SEEK − The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
then release it.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

134

2008 Civic Sedan

Each preset button’s frequency is
shown on the bottom of the audio
display.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１０：５３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.

If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.

Features

Press the AUDIO button to view the
audio control icons, then press the
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO
SEL flashing in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.

To turn off auto select, press the
AUTO SEL icon. This restores the
presets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
166 .

135

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：００：１６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Playing the XM Satellite Radio

XM RADIO ICON

MODE ICON

POWER/VOLUME
KNOB

JOYSTICK

CATEGORY
INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
XM RADIO
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET CHANNEL
NUMBER

TUNE BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

136

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：００：２４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.

You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, disc, pc card, etc.,
by touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display.

MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
touch the MODE icon. In channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels. In category mode,
such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,
you can select all of the channels
within that category. Each time you
touch and release the MODE icon,
the display changes between the
channel mode and the category
mode.

You can also operate the radio using
the control buttons on the left side of
the screen. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen each
time you press any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see the audio
information by touching the AUDIO
INFO icon on the lower of the screen.
CONTINUED

137

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
When you press and hold the
AUDIO button, the display also
shows all XM information.

Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the CD/XM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：００：３３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
TUNE − Press the TUNE bar to
change channel selections. Press
▲ for higher numbered channels
and ▼ for lower numbered
channels. In the category mode, you
can only select channels within that
category.

Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using each preset
button or preset icons on the screen.
Each preset button or icon stores
one channel from the XM1 band and
one channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:

CATEGORY − Press and hold
either side of the TUNE bar
(
or
) until you hear a beep
to select another category.
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.

SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button or
touch the SCAN icon on the screen.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button or touch the icon
again.

138

2008 Civic Sedan

1. Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
3. Pick the preset button (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the button (icon) until you
hear a beep.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：００：４２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.

Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button
(icon) to tune to it. Each preset
button’s channel is shown on the
bottom of the audio display.

‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − This channel has no
artist or title information at this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.

CONTINUED

139

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

5. Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.

XM Radio Display Messages

０７／０７／０３ ２１：００：４７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.

Signal weaker in
these areas.

The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

140

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：００：５８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:

There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.

Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Satellite Radio service
has expired or you purchased your
vehicle from a previous owner, you
can listen to a sampling of the
broadcasts available on XM Satellite
Radio. With the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,
push the power/volume knob to turn
on the audio system and press the
XM button. A variety of music types
and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE

bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.

141

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０１：１０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
SPEAKER SETTING

BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the L or R icon.
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker. To adjust the
sound strength, touch
or
on each side of the adjustment
bar.

BASS/TREBLE SETTING
SOUND ICON

You can adjust the sound on the
navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUND icon on the display.

BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. To
adjust the treble and bass, touch
or
on each side of the
treble or bass adjustment bar. The
adjustment bar on the right lower
display shows you the current
setting.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound. To adjust the
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR
icon.

142

2008 Civic Sedan

The right upper display shows you
the current setting of the sound
strength coming from each speaker.
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) − The SVC mode
controls the volume based on vehicle
speed. The faster you go, the louder
the audio volume becomes. As you
slow down, the audio volume
decreases. Touch the appropriate
icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
mode.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０１：１６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi.

You can also select the icon with the
joystick. Move it up and down to
move the highlighting and scroll
through lists. Select the icon, then
move the joystick to left or right to
change the setting.

Screen Mode

You can select the background
screen to display the sound level.
There are three screen modes: level
(the sound level is shown with the
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the
sound level appears as ripples of
water), and off. Each time you touch
the background icon, the display
changes.

The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.

143

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０１：２２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１４９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Playing a Disc
CD ICON

POWER/VOLUME
KNOB

JOYSTICK

OPEN BUTTON

CD BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON

FAST FORWARD
BUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

144

2008 Civic Sedan

SKIP＋BUTTON

SKIP−BUTTON

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０１：３４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
load or play discs, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.

This audio system can also play CDRs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3
or WMA formats. When playing a
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on
the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’
will appear on the screen. You can
select up to 99 folders and play up to
999 tracks. If the disc has a complex
structure, it takes a while to read the
disc before the system begins to play
it.

The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays CD FORMAT, and then
skips to the next file.

CONTINUED

145

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０１：４１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Load a Disc
DISC SLOT

OPEN BUTTON

The disc player is behind the
navigation screen. To use the disc
player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the disc player appears.

CLOSE BUTTON

Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way and begin to
play it.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.

146

2008 Civic Sedan

To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button on
the edge of the screen panel. Do not
use the folded screen as a tray. If
you put a cup, for example, on the
screen, the liquid inside the cup may
spill on the screen when you go over
a bump.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０１：５０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the disc player.

When playing a CD recorded with
text data, the track, album, and artist
name are shown on the audio display.
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,
the folder number and name, the file
number and name, the artist name,
and the elapsed time are shown. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes. If the disc
was not recorded with text data, it
will not be displayed.

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

PRESET BUTTONS

You can use the preset buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3 or
WMA mode). Each preset button’s
function is shown on the bottom of
the screen.

You can also select an icon with the
joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press the
ENT on the top of the joystick to
select the icon.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release
(preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
FF/REW − To move rapidly within
a track/file, press and hold
(preset 4) or
(preset 3).

CONTINUED

147

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD button. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
lower portion of the screen.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０１：５７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip
to the next folder, and the ▼ side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous folder.

FOLDER REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press and hold the RPT
button (preset 1). You will see
FOLDER REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder. Press the RPT button
again to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM button or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE bar also turns
off folder repeat.

FOLDER RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in each folder in random order,
rather than in the order they are
compressed. To activate folder
random, press the RDM button
(preset 2) twice. You will see
FOLDER RANDOM in the display.
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing the RDM button again, or if
you select a different folder with the
TUNE bar.

TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button
(preset 1). You will see TRACK
REPEAT in the display. Press and
hold the RPT button for 2 seconds to
turn it off.

TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a disc/folder) − This
feature plays the tracks within a disc
(the files within a folder) in random
order. To activate track random,
press and release the RDM button
(preset 2). You will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display. Press and
hold the RDM button for 2 seconds
to return to normal play.

148

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０２：０６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6) also turns off scan.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SCAN − This feature,
when activated, samples all the first
files in each folder on the disc in
order. To activate folder scan, press
and hold the SCAN button. You will
see FOLDER SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in
each folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system then
plays the first file in each folder for
10 seconds each. After playing the
first file of the last folder, the system
goes to normal playing.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the
SCAN button, also turns off folder
scan.

Using a Track List
FOLDER ICON

TRACK/FILE ICON

Features

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order
they were recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file on the
disc. Press and hold the SCAN
button for 2 seconds to get out of
scan mode and play the last track/
file sampled.

FOLDER NUMBER

RETURN ICON

You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
display. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display, then touch
the Track List icon. The track list
menu appears on the display.

CONTINUED

149

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０２：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, each track name is shown
on the audio display. With a disc
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder
number and the location are also
displayed.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, only the track number is shown.
To scroll through the display, touch
the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the
screen. To go back to the previous
display, touch the Return icon on the
screen.
Select the desired track/file by
touching the icon on the display. The
selected icon will be highlighted in
blue. The system begins to play the
selected track/file. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon
on the upper left of the screen to
move to the parent folder. The
current folder is highlighted in blue.

To Stop Playing a Disc
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or
XM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audio
unit, touch the CARD icon to play
the PC card. Press the CD button
again or touch the CD icon to switch
back to the disc player.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.

Removing a Disc

To remove a disc from the audio unit,
fold back the screen by pressing the
OPEN button (see page 146 ). Press
the disc eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You cannot close the screen if a disc
is partially inserted into its slot.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.

150

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０２：２１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Operating the Optional Disc
Changer
An optional six or eight disc changer
is available for your vehicle. This
disc changer uses the same controls
used for the in-dash disc player or
the radio.

Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page 168 .

Features

Load the desired discs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD/AUX button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use either side of the
TUNE bar. To select the previous
disc, press the ▲ side. To select the
next disc, press the ▼ side.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available disc to load and
play.

151

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０２：２９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Disc Player Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.

Error Message

Cause

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.
TOC Error

Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

High Temperature

152

2008 Civic Sedan

Solution
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
For more information, see page 169.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation. For
more information, see page 169.
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation. For
more information, see page 169.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０２：３６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Playing a PC Card
TRACK LIST ICON

PC CARD ICON

JOYSTICK

POWER/VOLUME
KNOB

Features

PLAY MODE
ICON

OPEN BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON

FAST FORWARD
BUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

SKIP ＋ BUTTON

SKIP − BUTTON

153

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０２：４８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１５９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Play a PC card
You operate the PC card player with
the same controls used for the radio
and the disc player. To load or play a
card, the ignition switch must be in
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
The PC card player reads and plays
cards in MP3 or WMA formats.
Depending on the format, the screen
will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when
a card is playing. The card limit of
the player is 99 folders and 999
tracks. If the card has a complex
structure, it takes some time for the
system to begin playing it.
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,
the recommended PC cards for the
PC card reader are:
CompactFlash
Flash ATA
SD memory card

Always use the recommended
memory card with the appropriate
adapter (if an adapter is needed).
Some memory cards will not work in
this unit.
NOTE:
When you insert a PC card into
the slot, make sure you put it in
straight. If you cannot insert it,
remove it, and insert again.
Do not keep PC cards in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage them.
To avoid damaging the card
reader, do not insert hard disc
drive cards into the PC card slot.
You cannot close the screen
(move it to the upright position)
until the PC card is inserted all the
way into its slot or removed.

154

2008 Civic Sedan

Never insert foreign objects into
the PC card slot.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０２：５８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

In WMA format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, it
skips that file and plays the next
available folder or file.

Loading a PC Card
PC CARD SLOT

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
The drive will read the PC card and
begin to play it.
Return the screen to the upright
position by pressing the CLOSE
button on the edge of the screen
panel.
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the PC card player.

The PC card slot is behind the
navigation screen. To use the PC
card player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the PC card slot appears.

You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press any
of the appropriate control buttons.
The status bar appears on the
bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
screen.
CONTINUED

155

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０３：０８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
There are three play modes: Folder,
Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in
blue.

To Select a Play Mode
FOLDER MODE

PLAY MODE ICON

MODE INDICATOR

Folder mode plays tracks in the
order they were added to the card.
Artist mode plays tracks in
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
Album mode plays albums
(folders) in alphabetical order.

ARTIST MODE

PLAY MODE ICON

ALBUM MODE

PLAY MODE ICON

If play mode information was not
included in the tracks when they
were added to the card, it will not be
displayed on the screen.

MODE INDICATOR

156

2008 Civic Sedan

MODE INDICATOR

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０３：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

PLAY MODE ICON

Features

To select a play mode, push the
AUDIO button to show the audio
display, then touch the PLAY MODE
icon on the display.

Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
joystick, then press the ENT.

After you select the play mode, the
display changes to the selectable
playing menu. If you select
‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.

CONTINUED

157

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０３：２２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode immediately and begins to
play the files in order to the new list.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

To go back to the previous screen,
press the CANCEL button on the
right side of the screen. To exit the
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.

PRESET BUTTONS

You can use the preset buttons while
a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button’s function is
shown on the bottom of the screen.

158

2008 Civic Sedan

Icons on the screen can also be
selected with the joystick. Move the
joystick left or right and up or down
until the icon is highlighted, then
press the ENT on the top of the
joystick to select the icon.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０３：２９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

FF/REW − To move rapidly within
a file, press and hold
(preset 4)
or
(preset 3).
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip
the next folder, and to the ▼ side to
move the beginning of the current
folder. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous folder.

TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a file, press and release the RPT
button (preset 1). You will see
TRACK REPEAT in the display.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
REPEAT − This feature, when
activated, replays all the files on the
selected folder/artist/album in the
order they are recorded or listed. To
activate each repeat mode, press and
hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2
seconds. You will see FOLDER
REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or
ALBUM REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder/artist/album. Press
and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds again to turn it off. Pressing
the RDM button, or selecting a
different folder/artist/album with
the TUNE bar also turns off the
repeat feature.

TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a folder) − This feature
plays the files within a folder in
random order. To activate track
random, press and release the RDM
button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press and hold the RDM button for 2
seconds to return to normal play.
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
RANDOM − This feature, when
activated, plays all files in each
folder/artist/album in random order,
rather than in the order they are
recorded or listed. To activate each
random play, press the RDM button
(preset 2) 2 times. You will see
FOLDER RANDOM, ARTIST
RANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM in
the display.

CONTINUED

159

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

SKIP − Each time you press and
release
(preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０３：３５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate each random play by
pressing the RDM button again, or
you select a different folder/artist/
album with the TUNE bar.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all files on the PC card in the order
they are recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each file on the PC card.
Press and hold the SCAN button for
2 seconds to get out of scan mode
and play the last file sampled.

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
SCAN − This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder/artist/album on the PC
card in order. To activate each scan
feature, press and hold the SCAN
button until you hear a beep. You will
see FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCAN
or ALBUM SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system plays the first
file in each folder, in order, for 10
seconds each. After playing the first
file of the last folder/artist/album,
the system returns to normal play.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.

160

2008 Civic Sedan

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
folder/artist/album with the TUNE
bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
also turns off the scan feature.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０３：４４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Using a Track List
FOLDER ICON

ARTIST NAME

Features

TRACK LIST ICON

You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.

RETURN ICON

To scroll through the display, touch
the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the
screen. To go back to the previous
display, touch the Return icon.

In artist mode, the artist name is also
displayed on the right side of each
selectable icon. Select the desired
file.

To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. In folder mode, touch the
folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the parent folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
CONTINUED

161

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０３：５２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Song Search Function
ALBUM NAME

SONG SEARCH ICON

RETURN ICON
Folder mode is shown.

In album mode, the album name is
also displayed on the right side of
each selectable icon. Select the
desired file.

When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from
the track list display, the song search
menu appears.

162

2008 Civic Sedan

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

ARTIST ICON

ALBUM ICON

You can then select any of three
modes to search a file: Title by
Keyword, Artist, and Album.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０４：０１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Searching for a Song Title by Keyword
MORE ICON

To cancel the selected letter, select
the letter and touch the Delete icon.
To select more characters, touch the
More icon. The other character list
will be shown.

Searching for a Song by Artist Name
ARTIST LIST

FILE LIST

Features

DELETE ICON

LIST ICON

In Title by Keyword mode, enter the
title name, or any keyword, by
touching the letter icons on the
screen. Press the List icon to begin
the song search. If you press the
CANCEL button on the screen, the
display returns to the mode menu
without doing a search.

Select the Artist icon, and the artist
list appears. Select the desired artist,
and the artist’s file list is displayed.
After the system searches for a song,
a file list is displayed. To scroll
through the list, touch the ▲ or ▼
icon on the side of the screen. Select
the desired file by touching the
appropriate icon, or moving the
joystick and pressing the ENT.
CONTINUED

163

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０４：１０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１６９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Searching for a Song by Album Name
ALBUM LIST

Select the Album icon, and the
album list appears. Select the desired
album, and its song list is displayed.
You can then select the desired song
from the list.

To Stop Playing a PC card
To play the radio when a PC card is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or
XM2 icon. If a disc is in the audio
unit, press the CD button or touch
the CD icon to play the disc. Touch
the CARD icon to switch back to the
PC card player.
If you turn the system off while a PC
card is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the card will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the card will begin
playing where it left off.
When you leave the vehicle, always
remove the PC card from the audio
unit.

164

2008 Civic Sedan

Removing a PC Card

To remove a PC card from the audio
unit, fold back the screen by
pressing the OPEN button (see page
146 ). Press the eject button (
)
to remove the card. If you do not
remove it from the slot, you cannot
return the screen to the upright
position.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You can also eject a card when the
ignition switch is off.
PC Card Player Malfunction
If there is a problem with the PC
card player, see your dealer.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０４：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
PC Card Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a PC card, find
the solution in the chart to the right.
If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.

Solution

Error Message
FILE ERROR
NO MUSIC

Features

MEDIA ERROR

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the disc. There is a
possibility that the files have been damaged.
It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMA files in
the PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.
It appears when the unsupported PC card is inserted. The system supports
CF card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk 6-in-1 Card Adapter.

165

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０４：２３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.

166

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０４：２９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

AM/FM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.

Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.

167

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０４：３９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the
system.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.

168

2008 Civic Sedan

Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０４：５０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Your Discs

Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:

1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Bubbled/
Wrinkled

With Label/
Sticker

2. Damaged discs

Chipped/
Cracked

Using Printer
Label Kit

Sealed

With Plastic
Ring

3. Poor quality discs

Warped

Burrs

CONTINUED

169

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

Additional Information of
Recommended Discs
The disc player/changer has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated below, it may
become stuck inside and damage the
audio unit.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０５：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Protecting Your Discs
4. Small, irregular shaped discs

3-inch (8-cm) CD

5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs

Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.

Can Shape

Arrow Shape

170

2008 Civic Sedan

Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.

Audio unit may not play the
following formats.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０５：０９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Remote Audio Controls
CH BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
disc (if a disc is loaded), or a PC card
(if it is loaded). On models with
satellite radio system, you can also
select XM radio.

If equipped

Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.

If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press and release the
top (＋) of the button, the system
goes to the next preset station on the
band you are listening to. Press and
release the bottom (−) to go back to
the previous station.
To activate the seek function, press
and hold the top (＋) or bottom (−)
of the CH button until you hear a

beep. The system searches up or
down from the current frequency to
find a station with a strong signal.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
each time you press the top (＋) of
the CH button. Press the bottom
(−) to return to the beginning of the
current track or file. Press it twice to
return to the previous track or file.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).

CONTINUED

171

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

VOL BUTTON

The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０５：１４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top (＋) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the
previous file.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top (＋) of the
CH button until you hear a beep, to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous folder.

Auxiliary Input Jack
On all models except DX

The auxiliary input jack is
underneath the accessory power
socket on the front panel. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.

172

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０５：１９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Radio Theft Protection
On all models except U.S. DX

You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
next time you turn on the system.
Use the preset buttons (icons on
vehicles with navigation system) to
enter the code. The code is on the
radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.

Features

Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific digit code using the
preset buttons (icon on vehicle’s with
navigation system). Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from specific
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.

If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have 10 tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.

173

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０５：２９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１７９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system

To set the time, press the CLOCK
(AM, AM/FM) button until the
displayed time begins to blink, then
release the button.

All models except Si

CLOCK BUTTON

Si model

CLOCK BUTTON

Change the hours by pressing the H
(preset 1) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(preset 2) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK (AM, AM/FM)
button again to enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing the
CLOCK (AM, AM/FM) button until
you hear a beep, then pressing the R
(preset 3) button sets the clock back
to the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the clock
sets forward to the beginning of the
next hour.

HOUR BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

MINUTE BUTTON

For example:

1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00

174

2008 Civic Sedan

HOUR BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

MINUTE BUTTON

On models with navigation system

The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０５：３８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Security System
If equipped

The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
driver’s lock tab, door lock master
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.

Except Si

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the trunk, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter will cause it to
alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.

With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the master key
or the remote transmitter without
triggering the alarm. The alarm will
sound if the trunk lock is forced, or
the trunk is opened with the trunk
release handle.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and trunk open
indicators on the instrument panel
(see page 61 ) to see if the doors and
trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
part of the monitor display, manually
check the hood.
NOTE: To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
system is set, the horn will beep
once.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.

175

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights (low beam), parking
lights, side marker lights, and
taillights flash if someone attempts
to break into your vehicle or remove
the radio. This alarm continues for 2
minutes, then it stops. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０５：４７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Cruise Control
If equipped

Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.

Using the Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON

RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON

SET/DECEL
BUTTON

1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

176

2008 Civic Sedan

3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０５：５５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:

To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Push on the accelerator pedal until
you reach the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.

Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel goes out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.

177

2008 Civic Sedan

Features

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.

You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０６：０３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL
BUTTON

You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:

Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.

178

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０６：０６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８４

Main Menu

Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 180
Fuel Recommendation .................. 180
Service Station Procedures .......... 181
Refueling..................................... 181
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 182
Oil Check .................................... 183
Engine Coolant Check .............. 185
Fuel Economy ................................ 186
Accessories and Modifications .... 189
Carrying Cargo .............................. 191

179

2008 Civic Sedan

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０６：１６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.

Fuel Recommendation
All models except Si

Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Si model only

Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operate
on premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane number of 91 or higher.
Use of a lower octane gasoline can
cause occasional metallic knocking
noises in the engine and will result in
decreased engine performance. Use
of a gasoline with a pump octane
number less than 87 can lead to
engine damage.

180

2008 Civic Sedan

We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０６：２６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.

Refueling
Push

On Si model

You may hear a knocking noise from
the engine if you drive the vehicle at
low engine speed (below about 1,000
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
raise the engine speed by shifting to
a lower gear.

1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pushing
on the handle to the left of the
driver’s seat.

FUEL FILL CAP

CONTINUED

181

2008 Civic Sedan

Before Driving

Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.

If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.

Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０６：３３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Service Station Procedures
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 278 ). You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.

Opening and Closing the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.

1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard. The
hood will pop up slightly.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.

182

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０６：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
DIPSTICK

SUPPORT ROD

2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.

Except Si

3. Pull the support rod out of its clip
by holding the grip, and insert the
end into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly
to remove the support rod from
the hole. Put the support rod back
into its holding clip. Lower the
hood to about a foot (30 cm) above
the fender, then let it drop. Make
sure it is securely latched.

Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.
CONTINUED

183

2008 Civic Sedan

Before Driving

GRIP

LATCH

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０６：５１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１８９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Service Station Procedures

DIPSTICK

Except Si

UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Si

UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK

4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.

184

2008 Civic Sedan

If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 232 .

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０６：５７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Service Station Procedure
Engine Coolant Check
MAX

MIN

Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 236 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.

MAX

RESERVE TANK

Before Driving

Except Si

RESERVE TANK

MIN

Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 228 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.

185

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０７：０６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A
range of miles per gallon achieved is
also provided.

City MPG

Highway MPG

Combined Fuel
Economy

Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

achieved is also provided.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.

Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit www.
fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
vehicles.gc.ca)

186

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０７：２０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuel Economy
Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
232).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An under-inflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.

Drive Efficiently

Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.

Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance

A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 228 ).
For example:

Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.

Always drive in the highest gear
possible − If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon.
CONTINUED

187

2008 Civic Sedan

Before Driving

Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０７：２９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Miles
driven

Gallons
of fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques

Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.

1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.

188

2008 Civic Sedan

L per
100 km

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０７：３７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.

Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.

Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system (if
equipped).

Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 280 ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.

189

2008 Civic Sedan

Before Driving

Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle, or improve its performance.
These accessories have been
designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０７：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.

Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS)＊.

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.

Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.

Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
＊ : If equipped

190

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０７：５２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
DOOR POCKETS
TRUNK

CENTER POCKET

Glove box
Door pockets
Console compartment
Trunk, including the rear seats
when folded down
Center pocket

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

GLOVE BOX

191

2008 Civic Sedan

Before Driving

However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０８：０１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S.A, 395 kg
for Canada.
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example

This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.

Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.

(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.

Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.

192

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０８：１４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Carrying Cargo

(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.

Example 1
Max Load (850 lbs)

Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)

Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)

Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)

Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)

Example 2

Example 3

In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.

193

2008 Civic Sedan

Before Driving

(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０８：２０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０１９９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.

Do not put any items on top of the
trunk panel. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.

If you fold down the back seat, tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.

If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 51 .

Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.

194

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０８：２４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２００

Main Menu

Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system, the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.

195

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

Driving Guidelines ......................... 196
Preparing to Drive ......................... 197
Starting the Engine........................ 198
Manual Transmission.................... 199
Automatic Transmission............... 202
Parking ............................................ 206
Braking System.............................. 207
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 208
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 210
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ......................... 212
Towing a Trailer ............................ 215

０７／１０／２６ １４：１１：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Driving Guidelines
Because of the low-profile tires
fitted to your vehicle, the alloy
wheels are closer to the ground.
Driving over a pothole or road
debris at too high a speed can
seriously damage a wheel. Slow
down under these conditions.

Si model

Your vehicle is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your vehicle has a
minimum of ground clearance and
very low-profile tires.
Use caution if you ever drive your
vehicle on very rough or rutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ can
also cause damage.

Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.

196

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０８：４０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your vehicle.

4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.

9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 14 ).

1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.

5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 91 ).

10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 57 ).

2. Check that the hood and trunk are
fully closed.

7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 75 ).

Driving

3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 254 ).

6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 102 ).

8. Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.

197

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０８：４９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Manual transmission:
Press the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Automatic transmission:

Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.

The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 77 .
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.

4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.

198

2008 Civic Sedan

6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.

The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０８：５７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Manual Transmission
cause your clutch to wear out faster.

The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse.

On vehicles with 6-speed manual
transmission, the lockout system
prevents you from shifting directly
from any forward gear to reverse
while the vehicle is moving at a
certain speed (see page 201 ).
When shifting up or down, make
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can

On Si model

Note: The engine can be damaged if
you inadvertently downshift into the
wrong gear (for example, going from
third gear at high rpms to second gear
instead of upshifting to fourth gear; the
engine speed limiter will not work in this
situation).

CONTINUED

199

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

Except Si

Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０９：０４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Manual Transmission
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.

Rapid slowing or speeding up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
On Si model

time on a hot day, be careful before
moving the shift lever. Because of
the heat, the shift lever may be
extremely hot. If the outside
temperature is low, the shift lever
feels cold.
Recommended Shift Points
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
With 5-speed manual transmission

Shift up

Normal acceleration

1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th

15 mph (24 km/h)
27 mph (43 km/h)
39 mph (63 km/h)
53 mph (85 km/h)

Your vehicle is equipped with an
aluminum shift lever. If you leave the
vehicle parked outside for a long

200

2008 Civic Sedan

With 6-speed manual transmission

Shift up

Normal acceleration

1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

17 mph (27 km/h)
29 mph (47 km/h)
37 mph (60 km/h)
43 mph (69 km/h)
49 mph (79 km/h)

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０９：１３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Manual Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.

Reverse Lockout
6-speed manual transmission

The manual transmission has
lockout so you cannot accidentally
shift from any forward gear to
reverse while the vehicle is moving
at a certain speed. If you cannot shift
to reverse when the vehicle is
stopped, do the following.

2. If you are still unable to shift to
reverse, apply the parking brake,
and turn the ignition key to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
3. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
reverse.
4. With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.

On Si model

Your vehicle has a rev limit indicator
to show you when the engine speed
is near the tachometer’s red zone
(see page 64 ).
1. With the clutch pedal pressed,
move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the neutral
gate, then shift to reverse.

201

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０９：２１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators

If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.

Shifting

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE
BUTTON

To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal and
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
You cannot shift out of Park when
the ignition switch is in the LOCK
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.

202

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０９：２８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Automatic Transmission
To shift from:
P to R

Press the shift lever release
button.

Move the shift lever.

Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 205 .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and press the release button to
shift from Park to reverse. To shift

from reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
CONTINUED

203

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

R to P
N to R
D3 to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D3
D3 to D
D to N
D to D3
N to D
R to N

Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０９：３６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２０９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Automatic Transmission
Drive (D3) − This position is
similar to D, except only the first
three gears are selected. Use D3
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain,
or to provide engine braking when
going down a steep hill. D3 can also
keep the transmission from cycling
between third, fourth, and fifth gears
in stop-and-go driving.

Second (2) − To shift to second,
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
First (1) − To shift from second to
first, press the release button. This
position locks the transmission in
first gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, D3, and D,
you can operate the transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.

204

2008 Civic Sedan

Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０９：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Do this if pushing on the brake pedal
and pressing the release button does
not shift the transmission out of
Park:

RELEASE
BUTTON

1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
NOTCH
COVER

4. Insert a key into the shift lock
release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
shift lever and move the lever out
of Park to neutral.

SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SLOT

6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the shift lever side.
Return the key to the ignition
switch, press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.

205

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the notch of the cover to
remove it.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：０９：５４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.

Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.

If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors.
On vehicles with security system

Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.

206

2008 Civic Sedan

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.

Never install a sunshade between the
upper and lower meters on the
instrument panel. If you do, you could
cause heat damage to the upper meter
on a very hot day.

０７／０７／０４ １４：２３：０８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels may be disc or drum,
depending on the model. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.

Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.

Brake Pad Wear Indicators
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.

Driving

Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness
and reduces brake pad life. In
addition, fuel economy can be
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.

Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.

Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.

207

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１０：０８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page 279 .

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

208

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１０：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.

Test your brakes as instructed on
page 279 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.

ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.

On vehicles with VSA system

The VSA indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.

A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock.

Driving

If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.

209

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１０：２４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
If equipped
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.

VSA Activation Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA Activation indicator blinks.
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.

On U.S. models
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 211 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA off switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.

The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

210

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：１４：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch

Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.

VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 260 ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.

When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.

211

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the VSA system on
and off.

In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１０：４１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models only

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.

Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 266 ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.

212

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１０：４９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Refer to page 254 for tire inflation
guidelines.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.

information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page 255 ).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.

When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).

If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.

Driving

For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
may become overinflated. However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.

If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 211 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA off switch again.

Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire

213

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１０：５７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２１９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 266 ).
Each wheel (except the compact
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.

The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.

214

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１１：０３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.

Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.

Total Trailer Weight: The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.

Tongue Load: The weight that the
tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight. Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.

CONTINUED

215

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.

Load Limits

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１１：１３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60% of the load
toward the front of the trailer and
40% toward the rear, then re-adjust
the load as needed.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is:
(DX, LX, Canadian DX-G)
3,671 lbs (1,665 kg)
(EX, EX-L)
3,737 lbs (1,695 kg)
(Si)
3,924 lbs (1,780 kg)

Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
(DX, LX, Canadian DX-G)
1,940 lbs (880 kg)
on the front axle
1,731 lbs (785 kg)
on the rear axle
(EX, EX-L)
1,973 lbs (895 kg)
on the front axle
1,764 lbs (800 kg)
on the rear axle
(Si)
2,094 lbs (950 kg)
on the front axle
1,830 lbs (830 kg)
on the rear axle

216

2008 Civic Sedan

Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１１：２３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow.

Trailer Brakes

Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.

Safety Chains

Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.

If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.

CONTINUED

217

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.

Hitches

Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１１：２９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights

Additional Towing Equipment

Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, and local
regulations. Check with your local
trailer dealer or rental agency for the
requirements in your area, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.

Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.

218

2008 Civic Sedan

Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１１：３８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension,
cooling system, and lights are in
good operating condition.

The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.

All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.

Backing Up

Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking

Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.

The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.

219

2008 Civic Sedan

Driving

All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages 215 and 216 ).

Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１１：４７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Towing Speeds and Gears

Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use D position when
towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)

Making Turns and Braking

Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Driving on Hills

When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3.

220

2008 Civic Sedan

If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to second
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
down and stop when towing a trailer.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１４：２２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２６

Main Menu

Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.

221

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 309 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

Maintenance Safety ....................... 222
Maintenance Minder ..................... 223
Fluid Locations............................... 230
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 232
Changing the Engine Oil
and Filter..................................... 234
Engine Coolant ............................... 236
Windshield Washers ..................... 239
Transmission Fluid ........................ 240
Automatic Transmission........... 240
Manual Transmission ............... 241
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 242
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 243
Lights .............................................. 244
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 250
Floor Mats ...................................... 250
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 250
Wiper Blades .................................. 251
Wheels ............................................ 253
Tires ................................................ 254
Checking the Battery .................... 262
Vehicle Storage .............................. 264

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１２：０２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.

Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.

222

2008 Civic Sedan

Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.

Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１２：０９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and
indicated maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.

Engine Oil Life Display
SEL/RESET BUTTON

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 %−91 %
90 %−81 %
80 %−71 %
70 %−61 %
60 %−51 %
50 %−41 %
40 %−31 %
30 %−21 %
20 %−16 %
15 %−11 %
10 %−6 %
5 %−1 %
0%

Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%

CONTINUED

223

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the SEL/
RESET button repeatedly until the
engine oil life display appears (see
page 66 ).

The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the information display
according to this table:

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１２：１４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２２９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Maintenance Minder
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicator reminds you that the time
is coming soon to take your vehicle
in for the required maintenance.

MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)

SERVICE MESSAGE

ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR

When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.

224

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１２：２３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 226 ).
You can switch the display to the
odometer, the trip meter, and the
outside temperature indicator (if
equipped) by pushing the SEL/
RESET button on the dashboard
repeatedly.
NEGATIVE MILEAGE

When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.

When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
(
) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.

If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.

225

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator (
) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１２：３２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Maintenance Minder
You can change the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature (if
equipped) every time you press and
release the SEL/RESET button.

Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
(
) remains on even if you
change the information display.
Immediately have the service done,
and make sure to reset the display
(see Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display).

MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEM

All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 229 .

226

2008 Civic Sedan

Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
indicator is displayed.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１２：３９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
4. Press the SEL/RESET button for
more than 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’

Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.

CONTINUED

227

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

3. Press the SEL/RESET button for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１２：４８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Maintenance Minder
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.

Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 183 .

According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with ＃ will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.

Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
240 .

Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.

228

2008 Civic Sedan

Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 185 .

Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 242 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
254 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 244 .

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１２：５６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B

＊ 1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Symbol
1
2

3
4
5

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant

＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 228 .
NOTE:

Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluid
every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

229

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil＊1
Replace engine oil＊1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system＃
Fuel lines and connections＃

０７／１０／２６ １４：１４：２８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fluid Locations
Except Si model
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)

BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)

POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)＊

WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR

＊ : Except Canadian DX-G with manual transmission

230

2008 Civic Sedan

RADIATOR CAP

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１３：０４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fluid Locations
Si model
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)

CLUTCH FLUID
(Light gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

231

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１３：１１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Except Si

Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.

232

2008 Civic Sedan

Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１３：２０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Adding Engine Oil
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Si model:

The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
All models except Si:
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle, to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.

Ambient Temperature

Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.

Ambient Temperature

233

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is
preferred for improved fuel economy
and year-round protection in your
vehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil if
the temperature in your area never
goes below 20°F (−7°C).

Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API certification seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１３：２７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２３９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.

DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

Except Si

1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.

234

2008 Civic Sedan

2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１３：３８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
6. Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):

OIL FILTER

Except Si
3.9 US qt (3.7 )
Si
4.6 US qt (4.4 )
Except Si

Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.

4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.

7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.

5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
CONTINUED

235

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１３：４４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.

Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.

Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK

Except Si

If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

236

2008 Civic Sedan

RESERVE TANK

Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１３：５１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Engine Coolant
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.

RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Except Si

1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.

CONTINUED

237

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１３：５９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Engine Coolant

RADIATOR CAP

3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.

RESERVE TANK

Except Si

4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.

238

2008 Civic Sedan

RESERVE TANK

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１４：０７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.

LEVEL GAUGE

Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.

On Canadian models: The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page 64 ).

Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.

239

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

Except Si

When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１４：１６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.

Automatic Transmission
DIPSTICK

UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spills immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).

Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.

240

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１４：２６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid

6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The automatic transmission should
be drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.

FILLER BOLT

Correct Level
Except Si

Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt, and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall
the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

Correct Level

If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
CONTINUED

241

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
not mix with other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１４：３５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
The manual transmission should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.

Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.

Brake System
MAX

Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendations in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.

242

2008 Civic Sedan

MIN

The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１４：３９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Clutch Fluid

Power Steering Fluid

Manual Transmission only

UPPER LEVEL

Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.

MAX

The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.

LOWER LEVEL

All models except Si and Canadian DX-G
with manual transmission

Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.

A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.

243

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

MIN

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１４：５０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２４９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
should be done by your dealer or
other qualified technician.

Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.

244

2008 Civic Sedan

High Beam Headlight

1. To change the headlight bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its holder.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１５：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Lights
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.

BULB

Low Beam Headlight
HOLDING CLIP

5. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.

TAB

2. Remove the bulb by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.

1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.
CONTINUED

245

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

7. If you replaced a headlight bulb on
the driver’s side, reinstall the
engine coolant reserve tank.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１５：０８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.

SOCKET

Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb
HOLDING CLIP

6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.

TAB

3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.

8. Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clips,
and lock them in place by pushing
on their centers.
1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.

4. Remove the bulb by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.

246

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１５：１９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Lights
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pushing the bulb in and turning
it counterclockwise until it unlocks.

Replacing Rear Bulbs
(In Fenders)
FASTENER

5. Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.

3. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

FASTENER

1. Open the trunk.
Remove the screw from the center
of each fastener on the side of the
trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
2. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, backup light, turn signal, or side
marker.
CONTINUED

247

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.

8. Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clips,
and lock them in place by pushing
on their centers.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１５：３１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Trunk Lid)

BULB
BULBS

SOCKETS

BULB

3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

6. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.

7. Reinstall the trunk lining. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.

5. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.

8. Put the fasteners into the holes on
the side of the trunk lining.
Reinstall the screws.

FASTENERS

1. Open the trunk.
2. On all EX-L, Canadian LX, EX, and

248

2008 Civic Sedan

Si models

Remove the screw from the center
of each fastener on the trunk lid
trim. Pull the trim back.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１５：４１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Lights

BULB

4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.

Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb

5. Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
6. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
7. On all EX-L, Canadian LX, EX, and

BULB

Si models

3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

8. Put the fasteners into the holes on
the trunk lid trim. Reinstall the
screws.

SOCKET

1. Open the trunk, and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
3. Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks. Make sure
the new bulb is working.

249

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

SOCKET

Push the trunk lid trim back into
position.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１５：５１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
Cleaning the Seat Belts

Floor Mats
LOOP

If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
they can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Dust and Pollen Filter
On models with A/C

This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.

If equipped

The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. This keeps them from
sliding forward and possibly
interfering with vehicle operation.
If you remove the driver’s floor mat,
make sure to re-anchor it when you
put it back in your vehicle.

250

2008 Civic Sedan

Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomes less than usual.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１５：５９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.

WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB

1. Lift the wiper arm off the
windshield, raising the driver’s
side first, then the passenger’s
side.

2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Put a cloth on the edge of the
lock tab, then push up on the
lock tab carefully with a flat-tip
screwdriver.

Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
CONTINUED

251

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

To replace a wiper blade:

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１６：０６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Wiper Blades

WIPER ARM

BLADE

4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
TOP

Pivot the blade assembly toward
the wiper arm until it releases
from the wiper arm.

3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.

When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Make sure the three rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.

252

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１６：１４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Wiper Blades, Wheels
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Push down
the lock tab. Make sure the wiper
blade assembly locks in place.

TAB

7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
INDENT

If equipped

Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.

253

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

5. Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
Make sure the tab on the blade
assembly fits in the indent of the
wiper blade and the blade is
completely installed.

Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１６：２４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２５９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.

Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.

Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.

tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
On Canadian models

We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.

On U.S. models

Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.

The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 212 for
more information.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a

254

2008 Civic Sedan

Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１４：５９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.

While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.

(DX, Canadian DX-G with automatic
transmission)
Tire Size
P195/65R15 89H

Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm )

(Canadian DX-G with manual
transmission)
Tire Size
P195/65R15 89S

Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm )

(LX, EX, EX-L)
Tire Size
P205/55R16 89H

(Si)
Tire Size
P215/45R17 87V

Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )

Optional for Si
Tire Size
215/45ZR17 91W

Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )

The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 295 .

Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )

255

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.

Recommended Tire Pressures
The following charts show the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１５：１１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires
High Speed Driving
Si model only

We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),
be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressures as shown below. If you do
not, excessive heat can build up and
cause sudden tire failure.

Tire Size·Cold Tire Pressure for
High Speed Driving
Si model only

P215/45R17 87V
Front/Rear:
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )
Except Si model

Tire pressure for high-speed driving
is the same as for normal driving.
When you return to normal speed
driving, be sure to readjust the tire
pressure for normal driving. You
should wait until the tires are cold
before adjusting the tire pressure.
For convenience, the recommended
cold air pressures and tire sizes are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 295 .

256

2008 Civic Sedan

Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１５：２０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 297 ).

In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.

Maintenance

Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.

Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).

A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.

257

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：１５：３３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.

Tire Rotation

Tire Wear
On Si model only

Front

(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)

To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated. If
you purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.

258

2008 Civic Sedan

The tires that came on your vehicle
were designed and constructed to
provide superior grip during
acceleration, braking, and cornering.
As a trade-off, they will wear more
rapidly than tires used on ordinary
passenger vehicles. Because of the
vehicle’s weight distribution, and the
fact that the front wheels are the
driving wheels, you can expect them
to wear more rapidly than the rear
tires.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１５：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires
The mileage you can expect from
your vehicle tires is the same as
comparable mid-and rear-engine
sports cars, and it will vary greatly
with your driving habits.
If you drive moderately, the front
tires could last more than 10,000
miles (16,000 km). However, the
mileage will be substantially less if
you tend to drive your vehicle at the
upper limits of its capabilities.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.

The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of the wheels.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the ABS or VSA system to
activate.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels (if equipped). If you
do not, the tire pressure monitoring
system will not work.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.

CONTINUED

259

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

You should carefully inspect your
vehicle’s tires for wear, damage, and
proper inflation every 7,500 miles
(12,000 km).

Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).

０７／１０／２６ １４：１５：５４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires

Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.

Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels:
(DX, Canadian DX-G)
15 x 6 J
(LX, EX, EX-L)
16 x 6 1/2 J
(Si)
17 x 7 J
Tires:
(DX, Canadian DX-G with
automatic transmission)
P195/65R15 89H
(Canadian DX-G with manual
transmission)
P195/65R15 89S
(LX, EX, EX-L)
P205/55R16 89H
(Si)
P215/45R17 87V
(all season tire)
Optional

215/45ZR17 91W
(summer tire)

260

2008 Civic Sedan

See page 295 for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
297 for tire size and labeling
information.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１６：０８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.

Snow Tires

If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.

When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.

Tire Chains

If your vehicle is equipped with
summer tires, be aware that these
tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more
information, consult your dealer.

Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).

Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.

CH2311T
CONTINUED

261

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

Summer Tires
Si model only

０７／１０／２６ １４：１６：１６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tires, Checking the Battery
Checking the Battery
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Except Si

Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.

262

2008 Civic Sedan

Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１６：２４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Checking the Battery
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.

If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio, you
may see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the code (see page 173 ).

The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.

The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.

On vehicles with navigation system

Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.

263

2008 Civic Sedan

Maintenance

A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.

０７／１０／２６ １４：１６：３６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２６９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).

Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.

264

2008 Civic Sedan

Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fan cycles twice).
Preferably, do this once a month.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１７：５８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７０

Main Menu

Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.

Compact Spare Tire....................... 266
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 267
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 271
Jump Starting ................................. 273
If the Engine Overheats ............... 275
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 277
Charging System Indicator........... 277
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 278
Brake System Indicator ................ 279
Fuses ............................................... 280
Fuse Locations ............................... 284
Emergency Towing ....................... 286

Taking Care of the Unexpected

265

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１８：０７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.

Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

On Si model

Do not use a compact spare tire
mounted on a front wheel; it will
damage the limited slip differential
(see page 267 ).
On vehicles with the TPMS
system, the low tire pressure
indicator comes on and stays on
after you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire. After
several miles (kilometers) driving
with the compact spare tire, the
TPMS indicator comes on and the
low tire pressure indicator goes off.

Do not mount tire chains on the
compact spare tire.

266

2008 Civic Sedan

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１８：１７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.

The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.

The compact spare tire is smaller
than a standard tire, and it will affect
the vehicle’s handling. Drive
cautiously when the spare is
mounted on your vehicle.

Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.

JACK

TRUNK FLOOR

On Si model only

SPARE TIRE

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.

3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor by lifting up on the back edge.

2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.

5. Unscrew the wing bolt, and take
the spare tire out of its well.

4. Take the tool case out of the spare
tire.

CONTINUED

267

2008 Civic Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

The size difference may also cause
damage to the differential, so do not
mount the compact spare on the
front. If either front tire goes flat,
remove the rear tire on that same
side, mount the compact spare tire
on the rear, then mount the rear tire
on the front.

TOOL CASE

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１８：２３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
JACKING POINTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Canadian DX-G model

Remove the center cap from the
wheel with the extension.

6. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.

268

2008 Civic Sedan

7. Place the jack under the jacking
point. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１８：３１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

WHEEL
NUTS

EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH

9. Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.

WHEEL COVER

DX and U.S. LX models:

Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.

BRAKE HUB

10.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.

CONTINUED

269

2008 Civic Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

8. Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.

WHEEL NUTS

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１８：３９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
11.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.

WING BOLT

SPACER
CONE

12.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
For normal For spare
tire
tire

13.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
14.On EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX
models

Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.

270

2008 Civic Sedan

15.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
16.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
17.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１８：５２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
18.Store the jack and tools in the tool
case. Place the tool case in the
center of the flat tire.

Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.

You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.

20.Lower the trunk floor, and close
the trunk lid.

Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 273 .

21.On U.S. models
Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
page 214 ).

CONTINUED

271

2008 Civic Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

19.Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
not get scratched or damaged.

If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:

０７／１０／２６ １４：１６：４６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 286 .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 262 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
273 ).

The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 77 ).
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 198 .

272

2008 Civic Sedan

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 280 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 286 .

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１９：０９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.

A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.

Except Si

1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.

BOOSTER BATTERY

The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.

2. Turn off all the electrical
accessories: heater, A/C, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in neutral (manual)
or Park (automatic), and set the
parking brake.

CONTINUED

273

2008 Civic Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

You cannot start your vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.

To jump start your vehicle:

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１９：１７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２７９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Jump Starting
Si

Except Si

BOOSTER BATTERY

3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (＋) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (＋) terminal on the
booster battery.

4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

274

2008 Civic Sedan

6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１９：２４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.

If the Engine Overheats
The reading of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you
should take immediate action. The
only indication may be the
temperature gauge climbing to or
above the red mark. Or you may
see steam or spray coming from
under the hood.

Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.

CONTINUED

275

2008 Civic Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Driving with the temperature gauge
reading at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.

Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１９：３３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

If the Engine Overheats
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 286 ).
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
185 ). Add coolant if the level is
below the MIN mark.

7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the reading
reaches the middle of the
temperature gauge or lower
before checking the radiator.

Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.

276

2008 Civic Sedan

9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 286 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１９：４２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.

2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 183 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 232 ).
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
286 ).

Charging System
Indicator
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.

1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.

277

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１９：４９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the information display. Tighten the
cap until it clicks at least once.
Tightening the cap will not turn the
indicator off immediately; it can take
several days of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.

If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.

278

2008 Civic Sedan

If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It can take several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 303 ).

０７／０７／０３ ２１：１９：５６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Brake System Indicator
U.S.

Canada

The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.

If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.

If the ABS indicator comes on with
the brake system indicator, have
your vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.

Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 286 ).

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 242 ).

However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.

If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.

279

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：０３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuses
INTERIOR

UNDER-HOOD

TAB

FUSE LABEL

The fuses are in two fuse boxes. The
interior fuse box is underneath the
steering column.

The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side, next to the brake fluid
reservoir. To open it, push the tabs
as shown.

280

2008 Civic Sedan

Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
284 and 285 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：１０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuses
FUSE
BLOWN

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.

3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screwdriver.

4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided on the back of the
under-hood fuse box cover.

CONTINUED

281

2008 Civic Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：１６ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuses

BLOWN

5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.

If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.

282

2008 Civic Sedan

Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：２０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuses
All models except DX and Canadian
DX-G

If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. You
should reset the AUTO feature, (see
page 100 ).
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page 173 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected

When the audio system is disabled,
the clock setting in the audio system
will be canceled. You will need to
reset the clock (see page 174 ).

283

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：２７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２８９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.

Circuits Protected

50 A
40 A
−
20 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
−
−
7.5 A
−
(15 A)
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A

Headlight Main
Power Window Main
Not Used
Sub Fan Motor
Main Fan Motor (M/T)
Main Fan Motor (A/T)
Rear Defogger
Blower
Hazard
FI Sub
Stop and Horn
Not Used
Not Used
IGPS Oil Level
Not Used
Audio Amp＊1
IG Coil
FI Main
MG Clutch
DBW
Interior Light
Back Up

4
5
6
7

No. Amps.
1
2
3

100 A
(70 A)
60 A
50 A
30 A
30 A
40 A ＊2

Circuits Protected
Main Fuse
EPS＊1
Option Main
Ignition Switch Main
ABS/VSA Motor
ABS/VSA F/S

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

＊1 : If equipped
＊2 : On models with VSA system

284

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：３５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９０

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

7.5 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
(15 A)
−
(7.5 A)
−

Circuits Protected
Power Window
Fuel Pump
Alternator
ABS/VSA
Heated Seat＊
Not Used
TPMS＊
Not Used

No. Amps.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A

Circuits Protected
ODS
METER
SRS
Right Headlight High
Left Headlight High
Small (Interior)
Small (Exterior)
Right Headlight Low

Left Headlight Low
Headlight High Main
Small (Main)
Not Used
Headlight Low Main
Not Used
Not Used
Moonroof ＊
Door Lock
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
Rear ACC Socket＊
ACC
Passenger’s Power Window
Not Used
Right Rear Power Window
Left Rear Power Window
Not Used
ACC Radio
HAC
Daytime Running Light
Front Wiper

285

2008 Civic Sedan

Taking Care of the Unexpected

No. Amps.

10 A
20 A
15 A
−
20 A
−
−
(20 A)
20 A
20 A
−
(15 A)
15 A
20 A
−
20 A
20 A
−
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
＊ : If equipped
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

Circuits Protected

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：４７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
There are two ways to tow your
vehicle:
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on
the ground. This is an acceptable
way to tow your vehicle.

If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Manual transmission:

Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to neutral.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Automatic transmission:

Start the engine.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
Shift to D position for 5 seconds,
then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.

286

2008 Civic Sedan

Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
f ront wheels of f the ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,
do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below 35 mph (55 km/h).

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：５２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Emergency Towing
Do not tie down the vehicle at an
angle that would allow the towing
cables to contact the vehicle’s front
bumper. To avoid possible damage,
protect the front bumper with tape.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.

The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.

287

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：５５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

288

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２０：５８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９４

Main Menu

Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.

Identification Numbers ................. 290
Specifications ................................. 292
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 295
Treadwear .................................. 295
Traction....................................... 295
Temperature .............................. 296
Tire Labeling .................................. 297
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) − Required
Federal Explanation .............. 298

289

2008 Civic Sedan

Technical Information

Emissions Controls........................ 300
The Clean Air Act ...................... 300
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 300
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 300
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 300
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 301
PGM-FI System ..................... 301
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 301
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 301
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 301
Replacement Parts..................... 301
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 302
Emissions Testing ......................... 303

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２１：０３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.

COVER
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The VIN is also located on the
engine bulkhead. Slide the cover on
the engine compartment bulkhead to
view the VIN. Always close the cover
when finished.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

290

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２１：０９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.

Except Si

The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC/MANUAL
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Si

ENGINE NUMBER

291

2008 Civic Sedan

Technical Information

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NUMBER

０７／１０／２６ １４：２３：５９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track

Front
Rear

Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating

Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear

176.7 in (4,489 mm)
69.0 in (1,752 mm)
56.5 in (1,435 mm)
106.3 in (2,700 mm)
59.0 in (1,499 mm)
59.9 in (1,522 mm)

Engine
Type

Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio

See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.

Spark plugs＊1
Spark plugs＊2

5
2
3

＊1 : Except Si
＊2 : Si

292

2008 Civic Sedan

Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC＊1, DOHC i-VTEC＊2
4-cylinder gasoline engine
3.19 x 3.44 in (81.0 x 87.3 mm) ＊1
3.39 x 3.39 in (86 x 86 mm) ＊2
110 cu-in (1,799 cm ) ＊1
122 cu-in (1,998 cm ) ＊2
10.5 ＊1
11.0 ＊2
NGK:
IZFR6K11S
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11S
NGK:
IFR7G11KS
DENSO: SK22PR-M11S

０７／１０／２６ １４：２４：２３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Specifications
Capacities
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant

Change＊1 A/T
M/T
Total

Engine oil

A/T
M/T

Change＊2
Including filter
Without filter
Total

Manual
Change
transmission
fluid
Total

Approx. 13.2 US gal (50 )
1.40 US gal (5.3 ) ＊3
1.37 US gal (5.2 ) ＊3
1.19 US gal (4.5 ) ＊4
1.77 US gal (6.7 ) ＊3
1.72 US gal (6.5 ) ＊3
1.80 US gal (6.8 ) ＊4
) ＊3
) ＊4
) ＊3
) ＊4
) ＊3
) ＊4
) ＊3
) ＊4
) ＊3
) ＊4
)
)

Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Windshield
U.S. Vehicles
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer
Canada
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
reservoir
Vehicles
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
＊3 : Except Si
＊4 : Si

Lights
Headlights

High
Low
Front turn signal/side marker/
Parking lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Rear side marker lights
Back-up lights
Taillights
High-mount brake light
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light

HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1−15.9 oz (400−450 g)
SP-10

12 V − 60 W (HB3)
12 V − 51 W (HB4)
12 V − 21/5 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

21 W
21/5 W
2 CP
21 W
3 CP
21 W ＊3
5W
8W
8W
5W

Technical Information

3.9 US qt (3.7
4.6 US qt (4.4
3.7 US qt (3.5
4.4 US qt (4.2
4.8 US qt (4.5
5.8 US qt (5.5
1.5 US qt (1.4
1.6 US qt (1.5
1.7 US qt (1.6
1.8 US qt (1.7
2.5 US qt (2.4
6.2 US qt (5.9

Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant oil type

293

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：２４：４２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０２９９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Specifications
Battery
Capacity

U.S.
Vehicles

Canada
Vehicles
Fuses
Interior

Camber
Caster

−
−
−
−
−
−

36 AH/5 HR
45 AH/20 HR
38 AH/5 HR ＊7
47 AH/20 HR ＊7
38 AH/5 HR
47 AH/20 HR

See page 285 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the steering
column.
See page 284 or the fuse box
cover.

Under-hood

Alignment
Toe-in

12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V

Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front

0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−0°45’
7°24’

Tires
Size

Front/Rear

Spare

Pressure

Front/Rear

Spare
＊1 :
＊2 :
＊3 :
＊4 :
＊5 :
＊6 :
＊7 :
＊8 :

P195/65R15 89H ＊1
P195/65R15 89S ＊2
P205/55R16 89H ＊3
P215/45R17 87V ＊4
215/45ZR17 91W ＊6
T125/70D15 95M ＊5
T135/80R16 101M ＊7
T125/70D16 96M ＊8
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm

DX, Canadian DX-G with automatic transmission
Canadian DX-G with manual transmission
LX, EX, EX-L
Si (all season tires)
Except Si
Optional for Si (summer tires)
Si
Si without VSA system

294

2008 Civic Sedan

)＊1, 2
)＊3
)＊4, 6
)

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２２：１０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３００

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Technical Information

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.

295

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２２：１４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

296

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２２：３０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

Tire Size

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.

The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.

(1)

P205/55R16 89H
P
205
55
R

(1)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(3)

(2)

Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load

DOT −This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R −Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
FW6X −Tire type code.
2202 −Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

CONTINUED

297

2008 Civic Sedan

Technical Information

16
89

−Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
−Tire width in millimeters.
−Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
−Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
−Rim diameter in inches.
−Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
−Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２２：３９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Maximum Tire Pressure

Max Press −The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.
Maximum Tire Load

Max Load −The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
U.S. models only

Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)

298

2008 Civic Sedan

As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale

when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２２：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０４

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.

When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,

Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.

the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.

Technical Information

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.

299

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２２：５３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０５

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.

The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act＊
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
＊
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.

Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the

300

2008 Civic Sedan

intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２３：０３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０６

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.

Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
Technical Information

The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.

301

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２３：１０ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０７

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Three Way Catalytic Converter
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L

Si model

Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.

302

2008 Civic Sedan

Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２３：１９ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０８

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.

If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.

4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm, and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal and let the engine idle for 20
seconds.

CONTINUED

303

2008 Civic Sedan

Technical Information

3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２３：２４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３０９

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do
not use the cruise control. When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.

304

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２３：２７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１０

Main Menu

Warranty and Customer Relations

305

2008 Civic Sedan

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer Service Information..... 306
Warranty Coverages ..................... 307
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 308
Authorized Manuals ...................... 309

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２３：３５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１１

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.

Canadian Owners:

If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:

Customer Relations
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816

U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Tel: (800) 999-1009

306

2008 Civic Sedan

When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 290 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２３：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１２

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:

Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two

warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up

to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −

Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda

replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.

Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated

coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides

coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2008 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2008 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.

307

2008 Civic Sedan

Warranty and Customer Relations

New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.

０７／０８／０６ １２：５７：１３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１３

Main Menu

Table Of Contents

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

308

2008 Civic Sedan

To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.

０７／１０／２６ １４：２７：１７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１４

Main Menu

Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61SNA05

61SNA30
31SNA621
31SNA810
31SNAM20
31SNAQ20
HON-R

2006-2008 Honda Civic 2/4 Door
Service Manual
2006-2008 Honda Civic 2/4 Door
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2006 Model Series Honda Civic 2/4 Door
Body Repair Manual
2008 Honda Civic 4 Door Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda Civic
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda Civic Honda Service History
2008 Honda Civic 4 Door Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.

309

2008 Civic Sedan

Authorized Manuals

61SNA05EL

Form Description

Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２４：００ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１５

Main Menu

310

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：２４：４８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１６

Main Menu

Index
A

B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 65, 277
Jump Starting ............................. 273
Maintenance ............................... 262
Specifications ............................. 294
Before Driving ............................... 179
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18
Beverage Holders .......................... 106
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 208
Break-in, New Linings .............. 180
Bulb Replacement ..................... 247
Fluid ............................................ 242
Pad Wear Indicators .................. 207
Parking ........................................ 103
System Indicator .................. 59, 279
Braking System.............................. 207
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 180
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 73
Brights, Headlights ......................... 72
CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

INDEX

Accessories and Modifications .... 189
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 78
Accessory Power Socket .............. 106
Active Head Restraints ................... 94
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 233
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 21
Airbags, Additional Information .... 21
Additional Safety Precautions .... 32
Advanced Airbag System ........... 26
Airbag Service .............................. 31
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 29
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 24
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 29
SRS Components ......................... 21
Air Conditioning System ............... 108
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 255

Antifreeze ....................................... 236
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 60, 208
Operation .................................... 208
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 173
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock ............................................... 78
Armrest ............................................. 95
Audio System ................................. 112
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 81
Auto Door Locking .......................... 81
Auto Door Unlocking ...................... 83
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19
Automatic Speed Control.............. 176
Automatic Transmission............... 202
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 293
Checking Fluid Level ................ 240
Shifting ........................................ 202
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 202
Shift Lever Positions ................. 203
Shift Lock Release ..................... 205
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 172

０７／１０／２６ １４：２４：５４ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１７

Main Menu

Index
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 247
Brake Lights............................... 247
Front Side Marker Lights......... 246
Front Turn Signal Lights .......... 246
Headlights .......................... 244, 245
High-mount Brake Light .......... 249
Parking Lights ........................... 246
Rear Side Marker Lights .......... 247
Rear Turn Signal Lights ........... 247
Specifications ............................. 293
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 244

C
Card, PC .......................................... 153
Capacities Chart............................. 293
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 51
Carrying Cargo .............................. 191
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
CD Player ............................... 124, 144
Ceiling Light ................................... 104
Certification Label ......................... 290
Chains ............................................. 261
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 267

Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 234
When to....................................... 223
Charging System Indicator .... 65, 277
Check Fuel Cap Message ............... 68
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 197
Child Safety ...................................... 33
Child Seats
LATCH Anchor System .............. 42
Lower Anchors ............................ 42
Tether Anchor Points ................. 45
Childproof Door Locks ................... 80
Clock, Setting the .......................... 174
Clutch Fluid .................................... 243
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 300
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 198
Compact Spare ............................... 266
Console Compartment .................. 106
Consumer Information.................. 306
Controls, Instruments and .............. 55
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 236
Checking ..................................... 185
Proper Solution .......................... 236
Temperature Gauge .................... 67

2008 Civic Sedan

Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 300
Cruise Control Operation ............. 176
Customer Service Information..... 306

D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 56
Daytime Running Lights................. 73
Defects, Reporting Safety＊ .......... 308
Defog and Defrost ......................... 111
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 74
Defrosting the Windows ............... 111
Dimensions ..................................... 292
Dimming the Headlights ................ 72
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 240
Engine Oil ................................... 183
Directional Signals ........................... 72
Disc Brake Pad Wear
Indicators .................................... 207
Disc Player ............................. 124, 144
Display Change Button ................... 66
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 236

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２４：１５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１８

Main Menu

Index
Doors
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 81
Auto Door Locking ...................... 81
Auto Door Unlocking .................. 83
Locking and Unlocking ............... 79
Power Door Locks ....................... 80
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ......... 295
Downshifting, Manual
Transmission .............................. 199
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 195
Economy ..................................... 186
Guidelines ................................... 196
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 250

Features .......................................... 107
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 181
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 250
Oil ................................................ 234
5-speed Manual Transmission
Checking Fluid Level ................ 241
Shifting the ................................. 199
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 74
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 267
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 240
Brake ........................................... 242
Clutch .......................................... 243
Locations .................................... 230
Manual Transmission ............... 241
Power Steering........................... 243
Windshield Washer ................... 239
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................................... 166
Folding Rear Seat ............................ 95
Four-way Flashers ........................... 74
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 24

F
Fan, Interior.................................... 108

CONTINUED

III

2008 Civic Sedan

INDEX

Economy, Fuel ............................... 186
Emergencies on the Road............. 265
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 273
Brake System Indicator ............ 279
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 267
Charging System Indicator ...... 277
Checking the Fuses................... 280
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 277
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 278

Overheated Engine ................... 275
Emergency Brake .......................... 103
Emergency Flashers ....................... 74
Emergency Towing ....................... 286
Emergency Trunk Opener ............. 87
Emissions Controls........................ 300
Emissions Testing ......................... 303
Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 67
Engine Speed Limiter ....... 201, 204
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ....................................... 278
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 65, 277
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 232
Overheating................................ 275
Specifications ............................. 292
Starting........................................ 198
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 181
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 300
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 51
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 16

０７／０７／０３ ２１：２４：２２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３１９

Main Menu

Index
Fuel .................................................. 180
Fill Door and Cap....................... 181
Gauge ............................................ 67
Octane Requirement ................. 180
Oxygenated ................................ 181
Reserve Indicator......................... 64
Tank, Filling the......................... 181
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 280

G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 186
Gasoline .......................................... 180
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 64
Gauge ............................................ 67
Octane Requirement ................. 180
Tank, Filling the......................... 181
Gas Station Procedures................. 181
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 67
Fuel ................................................ 67
Gearshift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........... 202
Manual Transmission ............... 199
Glove Box ....................................... 106

H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 244
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 74
Headlights
Aiming ......................................... 244
Daytime Running Lights............. 73
High Beam Indicator ................... 61
Reminder Beeper ......................... 72
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 244
Turning on .................................... 72
Head Restraints ............................... 92
Heated Mirrors .............................. 103
Heating and Cooling ...................... 108
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 198
High-Low Beam Switch .................. 72
High-mount Brake Light............... 249
Hood, Opening the ........................ 182
Horn............................................... 4, 70

Timing Control System ............. 301
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 59
Infant Restraint ................................ 38
Infant Seats
LATCH Anchor System .............. 42
Lower Anchors ............................ 42
Tether Anchor Points ................. 45
Inflation, Recommended Tire
Pressures .................................... 255
Information Display ......................... 66
Inside Mirror .................................. 102
Inspection, Tire .............................. 256
Instrument Panel ............................. 57
Instrument Panel Lights ................. 59
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 73
Instruments and Controls ............... 55
Interior Lights ................................ 104
Introduction ......................................... i

Identification Number, Vehicle.... 290
Ignition
Keys............................................... 76
Switch ............................................ 78

2008 Civic Sedan

Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 268
Jack, Tire ........................................ 267
Jump Starting ................................. 273

０７／１０／２６ １４：２５：０２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３２０

Main Menu

Index
K
Keys ................................................... 76

Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 65, 277
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator＊.............................. 63, 212
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 293

NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 290

L
M
Maintenance ................................... 221
Minder ................................. 223-229
Minder Indicator .......................... 65
Owner Maintenance Checks.... 228
Safety........................................... 222
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 278
Manual Transmission.................... 199
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 241
Meters, Gauges ................................ 66
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 181
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 102
Moonroof ........................................ 100
MP3/WMA ............................ 125, 145

N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 203
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 180
Normal Shift Speeds...................... 200

Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 180
Odometer .......................................... 66
Odometer, Trip ................................ 67
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 234
Change, When to ....................... 223
Checking Engine ....................... 183
Pressure Indicator ............... 65, 277
Selecting Proper Viscosity........ 232
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 78
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 300
Outside Mirrors ............................. 102
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 68
Overheating, Engine ..................... 275
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 228
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 181
INDEX

Label, Certification ........................ 290
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 72
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19
LATCH Anchor System .................. 42
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 244
Indicator ........................................ 59
Parking .......................................... 72
Turn Signal ................................... 72
Load Limits..................................... 192
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 78
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 78
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 181
Power Door .................................. 80
Trunk ............................................ 86
Low Coolant Level ......................... 185
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 64
Lower Anchors................................. 42
Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 199

CONTINUED

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：２５：０７ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３２１

Main Menu

Index
P
Panel Brightness Control ............... 73
Park Gear Position......................... 203
Parking ............................................ 206
Parking Brake ................................ 103
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 59, 279
Parking Lights.................................. 72
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 302
Playing a Disc ......................... 124, 144
Playing a PC Card .......................... 153
Playing the Radio ................... 115, 132
PGM-FI System.............................. 301
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Protecting Children ......................... 33
General Guidelines ...................... 33
Protecting Infants ............................ 38
Protecting Larger Children ............ 47
Protecting Small Children .............. 39

R
Radiator Overheating .................... 275
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 114
Radio/CD/PC Card Sound
System......................................... 132
Readiness Codes ............................ 278
Rear Lights, Bulb
Replacement ........................ 247-249
Rear Seat, Folding ........................... 95
Rear View Mirror........................... 102
Rear Window Defogger .................. 74
Reclining the Seat Backs ................ 91
Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 200
Reminder Lights .............................. 59
Remote Audio Controls................. 171
Remote Transmitter ........................ 88
Replacement Information
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 250
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 234
Fuses ........................................... 280
Light Bulbs ................................. 244
Maintenance Minder ................. 223
Tires ............................................ 259
Wiper Blades .............................. 251

2008 Civic Sedan

Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 20
Reserve Tank, Engine
Coolant ................................ 185, 236
Restraint, Child ................................ 33
Reverse Gear Position................... 203
Rotation, Tire ................................. 258

S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 18
Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 308
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 52
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Additional Information ................ 18
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19
Maintenance......................... 20, 250
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 18, 59

０７／１０／２６ １４：２５：１３ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３２２

Main Menu

Index
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC) ........ 118, 142
Spotlights ........................................ 104
SRS, Additional Information........... 21
Additional Safety Precautions .... 32
Advanced Airbag System ........... 26
Airbag Service .............................. 31
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 30
How the SRS Indicator
Works ........................................ 29
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 24
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 29
SRS Components ......................... 21
SRS Indicator.............................. 29, 60
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 78
Starting the Engine........................ 198
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 198
With a Dead Battery ................. 273
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 275

Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 75
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 78
Stereo Sound System .................... 112
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 264
Supplemental Restraint
System................................... 9, 21
Servicing ....................................... 31
SRS Indicator.......................... 29, 60
System Components.................... 21
SVC .......................................... 118, 142
Synthetic Oil ................................... 233

T
Taillights, Changing
Bulbs ................................... 247, 248
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 265

INDEX

Seat Belts
System Components.................... 18
Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 14
Seats, Adjusting the ......................... 91
Security System ............................. 175
Serial Number ................................ 290
Service Intervals ............................ 223
Service Manual＊ ............................ 309
Service Station Procedures .......... 181
Setting the Clock ........................... 174
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 202
Shift Lock Release ......................... 205
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 27
Off Indicator ........................... 30, 60
Side Curtain Airbags ................... 9, 29
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement ....................... 246, 247
Signaling Turns ................................ 72
Snow Tires ...................................... 261
Sound System ................................. 112
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 266
Specifications ............................. 294
Specifications Charts..................... 292
Speed Control ................................. 176

CONTINUED

VII

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：２５：１８ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３２３

Main Menu

Index
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ..... 295
Emissions Control Systems ...... 300
Emissions Testing ..................... 303
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 181
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 301
Tire Labeling .................................. 297
Temperature Gauge ........................ 67
Tether Anchor Points...................... 45
Theft Protection............................. 175
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 302
Time, Setting the ........................... 174
Tire Chains ..................................... 261
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 267
Tire Information＊ .......................... 295
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)＊ ................................. 212
Indicator＊.............................. 63, 213
Required Federal
Explanation＊........................... 298
Tires ................................................ 254
Air Pressure ............................... 255
Checking Wear .......................... 256
Compact Spare ........................... 266
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ..... 295

High Speed Driving ................... 256
Inflation ....................................... 254
Inspection ................................... 256
Maintenance ............................... 258
Replacing .................................... 259
Rotating....................................... 258
Service Life ................................. 257
Snow ............................................ 261
Specifications ..................... 260, 294
Tire Chains ................................. 261
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 267
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 215
Emergency Towing ................... 286
Traction Devices ............................ 261
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 240
Checking Fluid Level,
Manual .................................... 241
Fluid Selection ................... 240, 241
Identification Number............... 290
Shifting the Automatic .............. 202
Shifting the Manual ................... 199
Treadwear＊ .................................... 295
Trip Meter ........................................ 67

VIII

2008 Civic Sedan

Trunk................................................. 86
Opening......................................... 86
Open Monitor Light .................... 61
Turn Signals ..................................... 72

U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 265
Uniform Tire Quality Grading＊ ... 295
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 180
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 236

V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 105
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 192
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 292
Vehicle Identification Number..... 290
Vehicle Storage .............................. 264
VIN .................................................. 290
Viscosity, Oil................................... 233

０７／１０／２６ １４：２５：２２ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３２４

Main Menu

Index
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System......................... 210
Activation Indicator ............. 62, 210
Off Switch ................................... 211
System Indicator .................. 62, 210

Washers ........................................ 71
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 251
Operation ...................................... 71
Worn Tires ............................. 256, 257
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 286

W
＊

:U.S. only

INDEX

WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 52
Warranty Coverages ..................... 307
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 239
Indicator ........................................ 64
Operation ...................................... 71
Wheel .............................................. 253
Adjusting the Steering ................ 75
Alignment and Balance ............. 258
Compact Spare ........................... 266
Nut Wrench ................................ 268
Windows
Operating the Power ................... 99
Rear, Defogger ............................ 74
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 71
Defroster .................................... 111

2008 Civic Sedan

０７／１０／２６ １４：２５：４５ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０３２５

Main Menu

Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Except Si
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Si
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
13.2 US gal (50 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
Except Si
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 233 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.9 US qt (3.7 )
Si
API Premium grade 5W-30
detergent oil (see page 233 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.6 US qt (4.4 )

Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) (see page
240 ).
Manual Transmission Fluid:
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
241 ).
Capacity (including differential):
Except Si
1.5 US qt (1.4 )
Si
1.6 US qt (1.5 )
Power Steering Fluid:
All models except Si and
Canadian DX-G (M/T)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 243 ).

2008 Civic Sedan

Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 242 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
DX, Canadian DX-G
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
LX, EX, EX-L
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Si
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０７／１０／２６ １４：２５：５１ ３１ＳＮＡ６２０ ０００１

Main Menu

Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

OWNER

This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Civic 4-door. You may find descriptions
of equipment and features that are not on
your particular model.

ADDRESS
STREET

CITY

STATE/PROVINCE

ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE

V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE

The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME

DEALER NO.

ADDRESS
STREET

CITY

STATE/PROVINCE

ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE

OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE

2008 Civic Sedan

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33SNAC21

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Macintosh
Modify Date                     : 2010:03:19 14:25:44-07:00
Create Date                     : 2007:07:04 09:36:29Z
Metadata Date                   : 2010:03:19 14:25:44-07:00
Document ID                     : uuid:162c7793-b506-49ff-99ce-6b9066dd45cd
Instance ID                     : uuid:bdc4e1c2-ed42-4884-9aab-b534f0fac365
Format                          : application/pdf
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 324

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Honda 2008 Civic Si Coupe Users Manual

Honda-2008-Civic-Sedan-4-Door-Owners-Manual-107063 honda-2008-civic-sedan-4-door-owners-manual-107063

Honda-2008-Honda-Civic-Coupe-Owners-Manual-816646 honda-2008-honda-civic-coupe-owners-manual-816646

2008 Honda Civic Si Sedan Owners Manual NA0808OM Troubleshoot 2008 Honda Civic Si Sedan |

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation